Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
MODEL
7050
THIRD EDITION
APRIL 1997
CODE# CSM-7050
7050
SERVICE MANUAL
THIRD EDITION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced
person servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of
damage to the equipment, Konica Business Technologies strongly recommends that all servicing be performed by Konica-trained service technicians only.
Changes may have been made to this equipment to
improve its performance after this service manual was
printed. Accordingly, Konica Business Technologies,
Inc., makes no representations or warranties, either
expressed or implied, that the information contained in
this service manual is complete or accurate. It is understood that the user of this manual must assume all risks
or personal injury and/or damage to the equipment while
servicing the equipment for which this service manual
is intended.
Corporate Publications Department
1999, KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REVISION HISTORY ................................................... vii
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................. ix
SAFETY CIRCUITS ...................................................... xi
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................

CENTER CROSS-SECTION ...................................
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM ....................................
Main Drive .........................................................
Drum/Developing Drive Unit .............................
Paper Feed Drive Unit .......................................
ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive Unit ...........
ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive Unit .........
1000 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit ..........
1500 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit ..........
EXTERNALS ...........................................................
Composition ......................................................
Disassembly and Reassembly ..........................
DRIVE UNIT ............................................................
Composition ......................................................
Mechanisms ......................................................
M1 (Main) Control ..............................................
M4 (Drum) Control .............................................
READ SECTION ......................................................
Composition ......................................................
Mechanisms ......................................................
M12 (Optics Drive) Control ................................
Exposure Control ...............................................
Original Read Control .......................................
APS Control .......................................................
AES Control .......................................................
WRITE UNIT ............................................................
Composition ......................................................
Mechanisms ......................................................
M5 (Polygon) Control ........................................
Image Write Control ...........................................
DRUM UNIT ............................................................
Composition ......................................................
Mechanisms ......................................................
PCL/PSL Control ...............................................
Separation Claw Control ...................................
Paper Guide Plate Control ................................
CORONA UNIT SECTION .......................................
Composition ......................................................
Mechanisms ......................................................
Transfer/Separation Corona Maintenance ........
Charge Control ..................................................
Transfer/Separation Control ..............................
M7 (Charge Wire Cleaning) Control .................
M8 (Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning)
Control .............................................................
OPERATION
See table of contents in operation section
MAIN BODY
OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION ................................. 2-1
IMAGE READ MECHANISM ...................................... 2-2
Outline .................................................................. 2-2
IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................... 2-3
Outline .................................................................. 2-3
Analog Processing ................................................ 2-3
A/D Conversion ..................................................... 2-3
Shading Correction ............................................... 2-3
Brightness/Density Conversion ............................. 2-4
AES Processing .................................................... 2-4
Text/Halftone Dot Identification ............................. 2-4
Filtering ................................................................. 2-4
Magnification Processing ...................................... 2-5
Reversal Processing ............................................. 2-6
Copy Correction ................................................. 2-6
SGU Selector ........................................................ 2-6
Write Density Control ............................................ 2-6
Error Dispersion Processing ................................. 2-6
Image Compression Processing ........................... 2-6
Memory ................................................................. 2-6
Two-Beam Control............................................... 2-6
IMAGE WRITE ........................................................... 2-7
Outline ................................................................. 2-7
Collimator Lens ................................................... 2-8
Beam Combining Prism ...................................... 2-8
Compression Prism ............................................. 2-8
Fine Adjustment Prism ......................................... 2-8
Polygon Mirror ..................................................... 2-8
f Lens ................................................................. 2-8
Cylindrical Lenses ............................................... 2-9
Index Sensor ....................................................... 2-9
IMAGE FORMATION ............................................... 2-10
Charging ............................................................ 2-10
Exposure ........................................................... 2-10
Developing ........................................................ 2-10
Transfer ............................................................. 2-10
Separation ......................................................... 2-11
Cleaning ............................................................ 2-11
PCL .................................................................... 2-11
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................... 2-13
System Configuration ........................................ 2-13
Outline of the System ......................................... 2-14
SPACE REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 2-15
iii
2-16
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-33
2-33
2-33
2-39
2-43
2-44
2-44
2-46
2-47
2-47
2-47
2-48
2-51
2-52
2-55
2-55
2-55
2-56
2-59
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-61
2-61
2-62
2-65
2-66
2-66
2-67
2-68
Revised 3/99
M152 (ADU Cooling Fan) Control ..................... 2-113

ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION ...... 2-114
Composition ...................................................... 2-114
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-114
Disassembly and Assembly .............................. 2-116
Paper Feed/Reversal Control ........................... 2-116
Conveyance Control ......................................... 2-118
ADU Mis-centering Detection Control ............... 2-119
CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................... 2-120
Composition ...................................................... 2-120
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-120
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-121
FM14 (Conveyance Suction) Control ................ 2-122
FUSING UNIT ......................................................... 2-123
Composition ...................................................... 2-123
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-123
Fusing Temperature Control ............................. 2-133
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL ............................... 2-134
Parts Through Which Current Flows When the
Main Switch is Turned OFF ............................. 2-134
Parts That Operate When the Main Switch is
Turned ON ...................................................... 2-134
Cooling Fan Control .......................................... 2-135
Operation Panel Control ................................... 2-137
Counter Control ................................................. 2-139
Option Control ................................................... 2-140
DEVELOPING UNIT ................................................ 2-69

Composition ...................................................... 2-69
Mechanism ........................................................ 2-69
M3 (Developing Drive) Control ......................... 2-72
M35 (Agitator Screw) Control ............................ 2-73
Developing Bias Control ................................... 2-73
Toner Density Control ....................................... 2-74
Dmax Control/Drum Jam Control ...................... 2-75
Gray Scale Correction Control .......................... 2-76
FM30 (Developing Suction) Control .................. 2-77
TONER SUPPLY UNIT ............................................ 2-78
Composition ...................................................... 2-78
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-78
Toner Level Detection Control .......................... 2-80
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT ..................... 2-81
Composition ...................................................... 2-81
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-81
PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................. 2-84
Composition ...................................................... 2-84
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-84
Paper Feed Control ........................................... 2-93
Paper Up/Down Control .................................... 2-95
Paper Size Detection Control ............................ 2-96
No Paper Detection Control .............................. 2-97
LCT 1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE
SECTION .................................................................. 2-98
Composition ........................................................ 2-98
Mechanisms ........................................................ 2-98
Disassembly and Reassembly ............................ 2-99
1000 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection
Control ............................................................. 2-101
LCT-1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE
SECTION ................................................................ 2-102
Composition ...................................................... 2-102
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-102
1500 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection
Control ............................................................. 2-104
LCT PAPER TRAY ................................................. 2-106
Composition ...................................................... 2-106
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-106
Tray Up/Down Control ...................................... 2-110
ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION ....... 2-111
Composition ...................................................... 2-111
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-111
Selector Guide .................................................. 2-112
Revised 3/99
DIAGRAMS
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING ............... 3-1
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ........................... 3-4
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 3-7
CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................. 3-23
OPERATION BOARD/1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ........... 3-35
DC DRIVER BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............... 3-38
TONER CONTROL SENSOR BOARD CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................................... 3-45
TRANSFER PAPER DETECTING BOARD
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................ 3-46
TRANSFER PAPER LED BOARD CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................................... 3-47
DRUM BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ........................ 3-47
TIMING CHART
TIMING CHART .......................................................... 4-1
ADU TIMING CHART ................................................. 4-2
JAM LIST
Paper Jam ................................................................. 5-1
FS-103/FS Cross-Reference Table ........................... 5-7
iv
CONTENTS
Warning ..................................................................... 5-8
Trouble .............................................................. 5-10
LIST OF CONNECTOR DISCONNECTIONS .......... 5-16
Paper Jamming ................................................. 5-16
Warning ............................................................. 5-16
Warning ............................................................. 5-17
Others ................................................................ 5-18
Polygon Motor Low Speed Rotation Timing ...... 7-17

Functions When Auto Button is Pressed or
Original is Placed in ADF ............................ 7-18
Switching Auto/Manual Priority ......................... 7-18
ATS Selection .................................................... 7-18
11x17 Double Count Setting ............................. 7-18
Setting Paper Size for Trays 2, 3, and 4 ............ 7-19
FS-103 Sub-tray Select (Printer) ........................ 7-19
FS-103 Original Count Over Control ................. 7-19
Message Language Selection .......................... 7-20
Priority of the Paper Size .................................... 7-20
Jumping Selection of the Paper Size ................ 7-20
FS-102/103 Overload Control Select ................. 7-20
Setting Intermittent Time for Running Test ....... 7-21
ADF Frame Erase Selection .............................. 7-21
PM Cycle Setting ................................................ 7-21
Finisher Initial Mode Setting .............................. 7-21
Clearing Fusing Failures .................................. 7-21
Auto Reset Setting ............................................. 7-21
Key Counter Operation Selection ...................... 7-22
Switching the Contents of Normal/High ............ 7-22
ADF Mode Lead Edge Erasure Setting ............. 7-22
Toner Level Detecting Selection ....................... 7-22
Master Key Code Setting ................................... 7-22
Original Image Shift Setting ............................... 7-23
Switching Longitudinal Line Paper/Transversal
Line Paper ........................................................ 7-23
25 Mode Address Map ........................................ 7-24
36 MODE .................................................................. 7-29
Setting Method .................................................... 7-29
Running Test Mode ............................................. 7-29
Adjusting Lead Edge Timing ............................... 7-30
Paper Feeding Loop Adjustment ........................ 7-30
Lead-to-Trail Magnification Adjustment .............. 7-31
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment ............................ 7-31
Electronic RDH Type Lead Edge Timing
Adjustment ........................................................ 7-32
Original Lead Edge Erasure Adjustment ............. 7-32
Optical Brake Adjustment ................................... 7-33
Centering Adjustment ......................................... 7-33
Writing Unit Adjustment for One-Sided .............. 7-34
ADU Adjustment for Rear Side .......................... 7-34
Adjustment on Original Image for One-Sided ... 7-35
Alternate Method of Adjustment: 36 Mode,
Address 80 ........................................................ 7-35
List of 36 Mode ................................................... 7-36
35 MODE .................................................................. 7-37
Setting Method .................................................. 7-37
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment .......................... 7-37
List of Mode 35 .................................................. 7-38
Test Patterns of 35 Mode ................................... 7-39
Overall Halftone (35-01) ............................. 7-39
Gray Scale Pattern (35-02) ......................... 7-40
Beam Misalignment Check (35-11) ............ 7-43
ADJUSTMENT
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT MANUAL ............ 6-1
ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS ........... 6-1
SETTING AND CHECKING WITH THE P
FUNCTION ............................................................... 6-3
List of Confirmation Item by Means of the
P Function ........................................................... 6-3
Confirmation of the PM Count and Resetting ...... 6-3
Setting the Density Shift ........................................ 6-4
Confirmation of the Drum Count and Resetting . 6-4
Service Data Control Operation Mode Access .... 6-4
Function to Control Data ...................................... 6-5
DIAGNOSTICS
47 MODE AND MULTI MODE .................................... 7-1
Method of Setting the 47 Mode............................ 7-1
Initializing the NVRAM ......................................... 7-2
Charge Corona Current Adjustment ................... 7-3
Transfer Current Adjustment ............................... 7-3
Separation (AC) Current Adjustment ................... 7-3
Separation (DC) Current Adjustment .................. 7-3
Charge Grid Voltage Adjustment ......................... 7-4
Developing Bias Adjustment ............................... 7-4
Test Pattern Density Adjustment ......................... 7-5
Initial Setting ........................................................ 7-5
Adjustment Mode List .......................................... 7-5
L Detection Adjustment ....................................... 7-6
Telephone Number Setting ................................. 7-6
Input Check List ................................................... 7-7
Output Check List ................................................ 7-9
Adjustment Mode List ........................................ 7-12
47 Mode Input/Output List for FS-103 ................ 7-14
25 MODE ................................................................. 7-15
Selection Method ............................................... 7-15
ECM ................................................................... 7-15
Copy Control/Service Control Mode Enable ..... 7-15
Data Control Function Select ............................ 7-15
Pre-heat Mode Temperature Selection ............. 7-16
Pre-heat Mode Shut Off Time ............................ 7-16
Selection of Fusing Control During Auto Shut
Off ..................................................................... 7-16
Setting of Auto Shut Off and Auto Pre-heat
Timing .............................................................. 7-16
Selecting Outside Erasing the Original ............... 7-17
Auto Outside Erasing the Original ....................... 7-17
Selecting Preliminary Rotation of Polygon
Motor ................................................................. 7-17
Revised 3/99
SERVICE
Linearity Evaluation Pattern (35-16) ........... 7-44

Process Overall Halftone (35-60) ............... 7-45
Read Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-30) .... 7-46
Copy Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-32) . 7-47
Write Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-36) .... 7-48
Electronic RDH GA Built-in Pattern
(35-37) ........................................................ 7-49
Writing Unit for Centering (35-80, P+1) ........ 7-50
ADU for Centering (35-80, P+2) ................... 7-51
Front Edge Timing (Printer) (35-80, P+3) ..... 7-52
Printer Type Horizontal Magnification (Main
Drive Speed Adjustment ) (35-80, P+4) ....... 7-53
Main Scanning Sub-scanning Alignment
(35-80, P+5) ............................................... 7-54
Adjustment of Gradation (LD1)
(35-80, P+6) ............................................... 7-55
(35-80, P+7) ............................................... 7-56
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS .......................................... 7-57
Adjustment for One-Sided ................................. 7-57
Tray Tilt Adjustment ........................................... 7-59
SERVICE SCHEDULE ............................................... 8-1

Service Schedule .................................................. 8-1
Maintenance Items ................................................ 8-2
Periodic Check (Main Body) ................................. 8-7
Periodic Check (I) (RADF [DF-306]) ..................... 8-9
Periodic Check (I) (FNS [FS-102]) ........................ 8-9
Regular Service FNS (FS-103) ........................... 8-10
SERVICE MATERIALS ............................................. 8-10
SPECIAL TOOLS LIST ............................................. 8-11
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION .......................................................... 9-1
Site Requirements ................................................ 9-1
Unpacking ............................................................. 9-1
Accessories .......................................................... 9-2
Installation Procedure ........................................... 9-3
L-Detection Adjustment ......................................... 9-8
Paper Size Setting ................................................ 9-9
Confirmation of Operation ................................... 9-12
INDEX
Revised 3/99
vi
vii
viii
ix
SAFETY CIRCUITS
Exposure Lamp (L1) Overheating
Protection Circuit
The electrical circuit of this machine contains the following

safety circuits to prevent an accident from occurring in the
event of an abnormality.
Overall safety circuit protector
Exposure lamp (L1) overheating protection circuit
Fusing heater lamps (L2, L4) overheating protection
circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide the
service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order
to prevent servicing errors that may impair their function.
Overall Safety Circuit Protector
Protection function provided by software

When the L1 CONT signal output from the protection
function control board (CB) by software becomes [L], L1
lights. At the same time, the L1 FB signal, which indicates
that L1 is lit, is output from DCPS2 to the CB.
The CB monitors both the L1 CONT and L1 FB signals.
If they differ from each other, main relay (RL1) will be
turned OFF, and power to L1 will be cut off.
CAUTION:
The function of RL1 must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
Protection function provided by the circuit breaker

(CBR)
Protection function using hardware timer circuit

(HT)
This function breaks the AC line instantaneously in the

event that an excessive current flows due to a short
between the AC line, for example.
CAUTION:
The function of the CBR must not be deactivated under any circumstances
whatever.
If L1 remains lit for more than prescribed time because of

some abnormality, the hardware timer on DCPS2 will
operate, forcibly cutting off the relay on this board.
CAUTION:
The function of relay must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
Protection function using optics temperature fuse

(f1)
If the temperature in the vicinity of f1 rises above
prescribed temperature f1 will blow, cutting off the flow
of current to L1.
CAUTION:
Do not under any circumstances use a
piece of wire, etc., In place of f1.
xi
Protection function provided by the upper thermostat

(TS1) and lower thermostat (TS2)
Fusing Heater Lamp (L2, L4) Overheating

Protection Circuit
This function turns OFF TS1 or TS2, directly cutting off the
power to L2, L3 and L4, if the temperature of the either
upper fusing roller or lower fusing roller exceeds the
specified value.
CAUTION:
Do not substitute a different electrical
conductor in place of TS1 or TS2.
Protection function provided by software

This function turns OFF fusing heater lamp 1 (L2), fusing
heater lamp 2 (L4) and main relay (RL1) in the event that
the output voltage from fusing temperature sensor 1 (TH1)
read the CPU is abnormal.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the contact face of
TH1 with respect to the roller, and replace
TH1 if it is abnormal.
Protection function provided by hardware circuit

This function uses a comparator circuit which compares
the output voltage of fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2
(TH1 and TH2) with the abnormal judgment reference
value. It disconnects L2, L4 and RL1 from the circuit in
the event that the output voltage of TH1 or TH2 exceeds
the reference value.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the contact face of TH1,
TH2 with respect to the roller, and replace
TH1, TH2 if it is abnormal.
xii
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

The caution labels are attached to the machine areas, as shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any
dangerous situations or serious injury.
CAUTION/ATTENTION/VORSICHT
High Temperature !
Temprature leve !
Heie Oberflche !
DO NOT TOUCH
Use care when clearing paper.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
VORSICHT
High temperature
Haute temperature
Hohe temperaturen
can cause burns.

Take care when
removing jam.
risque de brlure.
Soyez prudent en retirant
une feuille coince.
Knnen verbrennungen verursachen.
Bitte vorsicht bei antfernen

von papierstau.
Risque de brlure.
Soyez prudent en retirant la feuille coince.
Brandverletzungsgefahr.
Bei Beseitigung von Papierstaus vorsichtig
vorgehen.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
This portion is
internally very hot.
Do not touch it, lest
you should get burnt.
This portion is internally very hot.

Do not touch it, lest you should get burnt.
HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION.

VORSICHT HOCHSPANNUNG.
ATTENTION HAUTE TENTION.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The ADU guide plate is not
latched. Do not release it,
lest you may cause injury.
CAUTION
VORSICHT
ATTENTION
HIGH
TEMPERATURE
HEISSE INNENFLACHEN
TEMPERATURE ELEVEE
CAUTION:
This portion has a high

voltage generated.
Never touch it, lest you
should be electrically
shocked.
This portion is
internally very hot.
Do not touch it, lest
you should get burnt.
CAUTION:
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label
to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled, clean the label.
If you cannot make it legible or if the caution label is removed, please contact your Service
Centre.
xiii
OPERATION
OPERATIONS
User's Reference Guide Availability
7050 User's Reference Guides may be ordered from the East
Coast Parts Distribution Center using standard ordering procedures.
7050 User's Reference Guide
OP-01-7050
1-1
This page left blank intentionally.
1-2
MAIN BODY
OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION

Image read unit
Charging corona unit
Image write unit
Polygon mirror
Image processing unit
Developing unit
PCL
Fusing unit
Cleaning
unit
Separation
corona unit
PSL
Transfer
OPC drum
corona unit
Figure 1
In a digital copier, the light reflected from the original is converted into electrical signals, subjected to image processing, then
converted back into light and directed onto the drum.
Figure 1 shows the composition of the machine, and Figure 2 an outline of the digital copying process.
Optical data
Electrical signal
Electrical signal
Image processing
Image read
Original
Image write
Optical data
PCL
Cleaning
Charging
Developing
Separation <- Transfer corona
Fusing
Figure 2
2-1
IMAGE READ MECHANISM

Light source (halogen lamp)
1st mirror
2nd mirror
Lens
CCD image sensor
Figure 3
Outline
A halogen lamp is used as the light source. The light from the
lamp is directed onto the original.
The light reflected off the original is reflected by the 1st, 2nd and
3rd mirrors shown in Figure 3. Then, it is passed through the
lens and directed onto the CCD image sensor.
The CCD image sensor consists of 5000 pixels. One pixel is
7 m in length, and the length on the original that can be read
by one pixel is 63.5 m.
2-2
3rd mirror
MAIN BODY
IMAGE PROCESSING
CCD image
sensor
A/D
conversion
Brightness/density
conversion,
AES processing,
Text/dot pattern
judgement, filter/
magnification
processing
reversal
processing
Shading correction
A/D board
Image processing board
Write density
control
Selector SGU
Image write
Error dispersion
processing
Data compression
and expansion
Copy correction
2-beam control
Memory
Electronic RDH
Figure 4
White Correction
Outline
The voltage output from each pixel of the CCD sensor

when the white reference plate is exposed to the light from
the exposure lamp is memorized as the maximum output
value for that pixel.
The analog signal produced by the CCD sensor on the A/D

board is subjected to analog processing, then A/D-converted,
and subjected to image processing.
Image processing consists of shading correction, brightness/
density conversion, AES processing, text/dot pattern
judgement, filter/magnification change processing, copy
correction, write density correction, and 2-beam control. In
addition, error dispersion processing and data compression
are carried out within the electronic RDH.
Black Correction
The output voltage from each pixel of the CCD sensor
when the exposure lamp is out is memorized as the
minimum output voltage for that pixel.
Based on the difference between the white and black

data for each pixel memorized in 1 and 2 above, the
calculated result that indicates the number of the step
corresponding to the image data read from the original
is output to an accuracy of 10 bits.
Analog Processing
In the analog processing unit, the minute signals from the CCD
sensor are amplified and level-shifted into the A/D conversion
range.
Amplification and level-shifting are done automatically during
shading correction timing by an electronic variable resistor.
There is no need for any manual adjustment.
A/D Conversion
The image signals from the analog processing unit are converted one pixel at a time into 9-bit digital signals.
Shading Correction
Shading correction evens out the light distribution of the CCD
sensor. The following correction takes place at the specified
timing.
Figure 5
2-3
Brightness/Density Conversion
ADF mode (1-1): 176 mm x 28 mm
The signal resulting from shading correction corresponds to

the light reflected off the original, hence it is referred to as a
brightness signal. The brightness/density conversion section
converts the brightness signal into a density signal, as shown
below.
Density
176 mm
28mm
Figure 8
ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2): 176 mm x 210 mm

Brightness
Figure 6
AES Processing
A density that is suitable for the density of the original is
automatically selected by AES processing, and a suitable
copy made.
176 mm
AES Sampling Range

Platen mode: 176 mm x original length
210mm
Figure 9
Text/Dot Pattern Identification

In order to copy an original under the optimum conditions , the
text/dot pattern identification section judges whether the read
is text, dot pattern, or a photograph, and uses the results in the
subsequent filtering section.
176 mm
Filtering
The appropriate filtering takes place according to the kind of
original and the selected magnification.
Text filter: highlights the light and dark parts of the

original.
Dot pattern filter: reduces moire.
Photograph filter: improves the gray scale reproduction.
Figure 7
2-4
MAIN BODY
Magnification Processing
Front-to-Rear Magnification Change Processing

During Reduction
In an analog machine, the lead-to-trail magnification is changed

by changing the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and
front-to-rear magnification by changing the position of the
lens. In this machine, the lead-to-trail magnification is changed
by changing the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and the
front-to-rear magnification by means of electrical image
processing.
The read unit of the CCD (63.5 m) and the write unit of the
laser (63.5 m) are equal to each other, and remain unchanged
when the copy image is enlarged or reduced in the vertical
direction. As a result, write data that corresponds exactly to the
write position when the image is enlarged or reduced in the
vertical direction sometimes fails to exist.
As shown in the example of Figure 11, if the pixel data obtained

when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D5, the positions
of the read data when the image is reduced overlap each other
as indicated by R1to R5, hence the write positions fail to
coincide with the read positions. Therefore, the write density
is determined as shown below.
Original read position
Front-to-Rear Magnification Change Processing

During Enlargement
Data position when the

image is reduced
As shown in the example of Figure 10, if the pixel data

obtained when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D5,
the positions of the read data when the image is enlarged
are E1 to E5.. However, the following problems will occur
if the write data consists of this read data alone.
There will be a gap between one data and the next,

resulting in gaps in the image.
The data position and write position will not coincide

exactly.
Consequently, if the read data that corresponds exactly to
the write position fails to exist, as indicated by the dotted
lines of Figure 10, the write density is determined as shown
below.
Write position
Figure 11
Density Correction
Figure 11 is a graph the vertical axis of which represents
density (256 steps) and the horizontal axis of which represents
position: Here, the distance between E2 and E1 of Figure 10
is set out on the horizontal axis and divided into 16 steps. If the
position with respect to write data W2 is
, the density S can
be obtained using the following equation.
S = E1 + ( E2 E1 ) x
16
Original read position
Data position when

image is enlarged
Density
Write position
Fig.10
Position
Figure 12
2-5
Reversal Processing
Image Compression Processing
This function reverses the input brightness data in order to

reverse black and white when the reverse copy mode is
selected.
This processing function stores compressed image data in

the memory to enable a large quantity of image data to be
stored when electronic RDH is used.
Copy Correction
Memory
The copy correction function selects the density curve

corresponding to the density selected by the density button on
the operation panel. The selected density curve is applied to
the data that was subjected to filter/magnification change
processing.
Suitable density curves are provided for the text, photo, and
text and photo modes.
The memory can hold about seventy 8.5x11 size originals

consisting of average word processor text. The number of
pages will be less than this if the originals include many
photographs and halftone dot images. Expansion memory
units MU-101 and MU-102 are available as options.
Two-beam control
This function is used to adjust the timing of the laser data from
the two beams and also to detect and correct any deviation
between the two beams.
Selector, SGU
Selector is a function that switches between the image signal
from the electronic RDH, and the read time image processed
signal.
SGU is a function that generates various test patterns .
Write Density Control
Copy density
The write density control function converts image data to the

optimum laser exposure based on the characteristics related
to the drum like drum potential, toner density, etc.
Laser exposure level

Figure 13
Error Diffussion Processing

Error diffusion processing is intended to make efficient use of
the installed image memory and also to obtain a satisfactory
copy image.
2-6
MAIN BODY
IMAGE WRITE
CY2 lens
f lens unit
Polygon mirror
V mirror unit
3rd mirror
CY1 lens
Stepping motor
Compression prism 1
Semiconductor laser LD1
Beam combining prism
Collimator lens unit 1
Fine adjustment prism 2

Compression prism 2
Glass cover
Index mirror
Index sensor
Fine adjustment
prism 1
Semiconductor laser LD2
3rd mirror
2nd mirror
1st mirror
Figure 14
Outline
Figure 14 shows the layout of the various parts of the write unit.
The processed image data is emitted by semiconductor lasers.
The light from these lasers is sent via the path shown in Figure
15 to the OPC drum.
Semiconductor laser 1
(LD1)
(LD2)
Compression prism 1
Compression prism 2
Fine adjustment prism

1 (sub scanning)
Fine adjustment prism

2 (main scanning)
Beam combining
prism
Cylindrical lens 1 (cy1)
f lens
unit
V mirror
unit
3rd mirror
OPC drum
Cylindrical lens 2
(Cy2)
Index sensor
Index mirror
Figure 15
2-7
Polygon mirror
Collimator Lens
Polygon Mirror
Figure 16 shows the function of the collimator lens. This lens

is used to form the light that diverges from a point source into
a parallel beam.
This is a multi-sided mirror which converts the laser beam into

a scanning beam. The polygon mirror in this machine has
eight sides. Figure 18 shows the appearance of the polygon
mirror.
Semiconductor
laser
Collimator
lens
Parallel
beam
Figure 18
f Lens
The polygon mirror rotates at a constant angular speed.
Consequently, if a general image forming lens were to be used,
the speed at which the laser beam scans the surface of the
drum would vary between the center and the edge of the drum,
as shown in Figure 19.
Figure 16
Beam Combining Prism

This prism causes the beams from the two semiconductor
lasers that are mounted at right angles to each other to be
emitted in the same direction.
Laser beam
Polygon
mirror
Image forming lens
Drum;
Scanning
speed falls as
beam
approaches
center of
drum.
Figure 19
An f lens is used to maintain the scanning speed constant

over the entire length of the drum.

Fig.17
Laser beam
Compression Prism
Drum;
Scanning
speed is
constant.
This prism shapes the beam emitted from each semiconductor

laser and adjusts the height in the up/down direction.
Fine Adjustment Prism

This prism performs fine adjustment of the beam emitted from
each semiconductor laser in the left/right and up/down
directions.
Polygon
mirror
f lens
Cylindrical
lens
Figure 20
2-8
MAIN BODY
Cylindrical Lenses
Two lenses, cylindrical lens 1 (Cy1) and cylindrical lens 2
(Cy1), are used to eliminate the tilt error of the polygon mirror.
Cylindrical lenses 1 and 2 are positioned before and after the
polygon mirror, as shown in Figure 21. The laser beam is
focused on the polygon mirror by cylindrical lens 1, and the
light reflected off the polygon mirror is once again focused on
the drum by cylindrical lens 2.
The optical relationship between the polygon mirror and the
drum face with respect to cylindrical lens 2 is that of image and
object. Consequently, even if the polygon mirror is tilted, the
light path is corrected by cylindrical lens 2, ensuring that the
beam is scanned along the same line.
Semiconductor
laser
Cylindrical lens
1 (Cy1)
Collimator lens
f lens unit
Polygon
mirror
Mirror
Cylindrical lens
2 (Cy2)
Drum
Figure 21
Index Sensor
This sensor is intended to determine the leading edge write
position for each scan in the axial direction of the drum, and
also to determine the positions of the two beams.
2-9
IMAGE FORMATION
Developing
Charging
Figure 22
Figure 24
A negative charging method using a scorotron is employed. A

constant negative voltage is applied to the charging plate and
back plate in order to maintain the potential of the drum
constant.
Negatively charged toner adheres to the surface of the drum

where the charge was erased during the exposure process.
Exposure
Transfer
Drum
Transfer
corona unit
PSL
Figure 23
Figure 25
Exposure is done with the laser beams, causing the charge on

the drum to be erased. Two laser beams are used to write
(exposure) two lines of image data at a time.
The transfer corona unit causes the toner on the drum to be

transferred to the paper by means of a discharge from the back
of the paper.
The PSL improves the transfer of the toner and the separation
of the paper.
2-10
MAIN BODY
PCL
Separation
Drum
Separation corona unit
Figure 26
Figure 28
The PCL uses light to erase the potential remaining on the

surface of the drum.
The separation corona unit erases the charge on the paper by

applying an AC discharge from the back of the paper, thus
allowing the paper to separate from the drum under its own
weight.
Cleaning
Cleaning blade
Toner collecting roller
Drum
Figure 27
The toner remaining on the drum is removed by the cleaning

blade.
2-11
2-12
MAIN BODY
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
System Configuration
2-13
System Configuration
2-14
MAIN BODY
SPACE REQUIREMENTS
2-15
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Type
frame erasure, shift, reduction

shift, weekly timer, job memory,
same size standard mixed
original mode
Type:
Console type
(floor-mounted type)
Copying method:
Indirect electrostatic method
Original table method: Fixed
Photosensitive
material:
OPC
Sensitizing method:
Laser writing method
Paper feed method:
Two stacked trays (total capacity
of 500 sheets of 20 lb. paper)
Two LCT trays (1000 & 1500
sheet capacity of 20 lb. paper)
Bypass tray (150 sheet capacity
of 20 lb. paper)
Copy Paper
Plain paper
Special paper Label paper (specified by Konica)

OHP film (specified by Konica, bypass feed only)
Blueprint master (specified by Konica)
16 lb. to 32 lb. general purpose paper
Option
Key counter
Finisher:
Weekly timer:
Expansion memory unit:
Image processor:
Functions
Originals:
Original size:
Copy size:
Magnification
Fixed magnifications:
Sheets, books, solid objects

Max 11x17
11x17 to 5.5x8.5R
x0.50, x0.65, x0.77, x1.00, x1.29,
x1.55, x2.00
8.5x11
4.9
4.9
4.9
Continuous copy speed (life size, copies/minute)

Size
8.5x11
Number of
continuous copies:
Original density
selection:
Special functions:
FS-102/FS-103
WT-101K
MU-101/MU-102
IP-201
Machine Particulars
User set
magnifications:
Two
Zoom magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)
Vertical magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)
Horizontal
magnification:
x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)
Warm-up time:
Approximately 6.5 minutes
(68F, rated voltage)
First copy time (seconds)
Size
Manual
AES
APS
20 lb. to 24 lb. fine quality paper
8.5x11
50
1 to 999
AES, manual
arbitrarily set density
(two settings)
OHP intersheet, thin paper/thick
paper mode, 2 IN 1; 4 IN 1
mode, intersheet, insertion
page, chapter demarcation,
book copy, repeat, text/photo
mode, reversed black and
white mode, erasure outside
original area, fold erasure,
2-16
Power source:
115 VAC, 60 Hz, 20 A
Power consumption:
Weight:
Machine dimensions
Max. 1500 W
Approximately 440 lb.
MAIN BODY
Service
Service interval: Every 120,000 copies
Materials
Developer:
Toner:
Drum:
Konica 7050 only

Konica 7050 only
Konica 7050 only
Machine Working Environment

Temperature:50F to 86F
Humidity:
10% to 80%
The contents of this manual are subject to change without
notice.
2-17
CENTER CROSS-SECTION
Charge
corona unit
Exposure lamp
ADF
Cleaning unit
PCL
Image read unit
Image write unit

Image processing unit
Developing unit
Fusing unit
Paper feed unit
Upper tray
ADU paper exit/

conveyance unit
Conveyance unit
2nd paper feed unit
Lower tray
Transfer corona unit

ADU paper feed/
conveyance unit
PSL
Separation corona unit

LCT-1000 tray
LCT-1500 tray
2-18
MAIN BODY
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

Main Drive
2-19
Drum/Developing Drive Unit
2-20
MAIN BODY
Paper Feed Drive Unit
2-21
ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive Unit
2-22
MAIN BODY
ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive Unit
2-23
1000 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit
2-24
MAIN BODY
1500 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit
2-25
EXTERNALS
Composition
Main switch
Operation panel
Left side
upper
cover
ADF
Front door
Bypass feed
table
Paper exit tray

Upper tray
ADU
conveyance
door
Left side
lower cover
Lower tray
ADU
LCT-1000
tray
Paper feed
and
conveyance
door
ADF
connector
FNS connector
Right side
upper cover
Rear cover
LCT
conveyance door
LCT-1500
tray
Right side lower cover
Outer I/F connector
(2) Pull out the ozone filter box toward you, then attach the
handle to the board mounting panel and secure it.
(3) Pull up ozone filter (S), then pull it out and remove it.
Disassembly and Reassembly

Caution:
Be sure that the power cord has been

unplugged from the power outlet.
Caution: When replacing the ozone filter, secure the new
filter securely to the inside of the main body.
Replacing Ozone Filter (S)

Procedure
(1) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear
cover.
Ozone filter (S)
ADF
Ozone filter box
Set screw
Set screw
Set screws
Set screw
ADF
connector
(CN102)
Handle
Set screws
Board mounting panel
(5) Reinstall the ozone filter in the opposite sequence to

removal.
Set screw
Set screw
2-26
MAIN BODY
Replacing Ozone Filter (H)
Replacing the Dust Prevention Filter
Procedure
cover.
(2) Pull forward ozone filter (H) and remove it.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door and the ADU conveyance door.
(2) Loosen the four set screws, then remove the left side
upper cover.
Left side
upper cover
Set
screws
Ozone
filter (H)
Front door
ADU
conveyance
Set screws
(3) Open the ADF.

(4) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass
holder.
(3) Reinstall the ozone filter in the opposite sequence to

removal.
Replacing the Developing Suction Filter

Procedure
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the lock, open the filter box, and remove the
developing suction filter.
Set screws
Original
stopper plate
Platen
glass
Glass
holder
Developing
suction filter
Set screws
Filter box
(5) Remove the two set screws, then remove the original
stopper plate.
(6) Remove the platen glass.
(3) Reinstall the suction filter in the opposite sequence to

removal.
2-27
(7) Remove the two set screws, and remove the upper
cover (center).
Set screw
Set screw
Upper cover (center)
(8) Remove the old dustproof filter, then install the new
dustproof filter (filter has adhesive strip).
Dust prevention
filter
(9) Install the other parts in the reverse sequence to

removal.
2-28
MAIN BODY
DRIVE UNIT
Composition
Drum motor (M4)

Agitator screw motor (M35)
Main motor (M1)
Developing drive motor (M3)
Drum drive unit
Mechanisms
Mechanism
*1 Drum drive
*1 Developing sleeve drive
*1 Developing agitator drive
2nd paper feed drive
conveyance drive
Fusing and exit drive
ADU lead-in drive
Toner recycle
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. (Refer to
the drum carriage section.)
cover.
(3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the two
flywheels.
Method
Gear drive (dedicated motor)
Timing belt + gear drive
*1: Separation of the different parts of the drive system

The drum, developing sleeve, and developing agitator of
this machine are driven by separate motors in order to
improve the serviceability of the drum unit and also to
improve the developing performance.
Set screws
Removing and Reinstalling the Main Motor Unit

Flywheel
Caution:

Caution: Be sure to remove the drum carriage before removing
or reinstalling the main motor unit.
If you leave the drum carriage in place, the cleaning
blade is likely to be damaged because the drum will
turn when you remove or reinstall the flywheel.
2-29
(4) Disconnect the three connectors (CN204, 205 and

324), then remove the cable from the wiring clamp.
(5) Remove the four set screws, slide the main motor unit
to the right, then pull it forward and remove it.
Caution: DO NOT strike the main motor unit against the drum
drive gear when removing or reinstalling it.
(3) Remove the bearing, then remove the developing

drive gear unit.
Guide screw
Connectors
(CN204 and 205)
Set screw
Slotted hole
Developing drive
gear unit
Set screw
Bearing
Drum
drive gear
Main motor
unit
Set screw
Connector (CN324)
(4) Remove the spring, then loosen the two set screws
and remove the tension from main body drive belt.
(5) Remove the three set screws, then remove the fusing
drive plate.
Set screw
(6) Reinstall the main motor unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.
Set screws
Replacing the Paper Feed Drive Shaft and Fusing

Input Gear
Procedure
(1) Remove the main motor unit.
(2) Remove the e-ring.
Fusing drive plate
Fusing input
gear
Spring
Set screws
(Loosen)
Main body drive belt
E-ring
Caution: Be careful not to lose the polyslider when installing

the fusing drive plate.
(6) Remove the fusing input gear.
(7) Remove the four set screws, then remove the paper
feed drive plate.
Main motor unit
2-30
MAIN BODY
M1 (Main) Control
Set screws
Paper feed
drive plate
Polyslider
Fusing input gear
(8) Remove the bearing, polyslider and paper feed input

gear.
(9) Remove developing drive gear, then pull out the pin
remaining on the shaft.
(10) Remove the paper feed drive shaft.
Bearing
M1 (main) is controlled by the control board (CB) via the DC

driver board (DCDB).
Operation
M1 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the ADU paper
exit/conveyance, toner recycle, conveyance, 2nd paper
feed and fusing sections. M1 is PLL-controlled by feedback
signals from a speed sensor installed inside M1 itself,
maintaining it at a constant speed.
M1 goes ON when the start print button is pressed, and
goes OFF again when the final copy has been exited.
If the upper fusing roller fails to reach the set temperature
within the specified time from the start of warmup, M1
remains ON until the completion of warmup.
Developing drive
gear
Poly-slider
Paper feed
input gear
Signals
Input signal
M1 ACK (M1 > DCDB > CB)

[L] is output when M1 reaches the specified speed.
Paper feed
drive shaft
Output signals
M1 CONT (CB > DCDB > M1)

This is the M1 drive control signal.
[L]: M1 ON
[H]: M1 OFF
M1 CLK (CB > DCDB > M1)
This is the M1 rotational speed control reference clock
signal.
(11) Reinstall the paper feed drive shaft and fusing input
gear in the opposite sequence to removal.
2-31
M4 (Drum) Control
M4 (drum) is controlled by the control board (CB) via the DC

Operation
M4 is a 24 V drive DC motor that drives the drum and the
cleaning guide roller. M4 is PLL-controlled by a reference
signal and feedback signal from a speed sensor installed
inside M4 itself, maintaining it at a constant speed.
goes OFF again when the final copy has been exited.
Signals
Input signal
M4LD (M4 > DCDB > CB)

Output signals
M4CONT (CB > DCDB > M4)

[L]: M4 ON
[H]: M4 OFF
M4 H/L (CB > DCDB > M4)

This is the M4 rotational speed switchover signal.
Normally [H]: 280 mm/sec
[L] is used during warmup for D-max and gamma
correction, and in printer mode for 600 dpi.
2-32
MAIN BODY
READ SECTION
Composition
Optics unit
CCD unit
Front
Optics cooling fan (FM2)
Optics drive wire
A/D converter board

(ADB)
V mirror
(2nd and 3rd mirrors)
Optics rail (R)
Mechanisms
Mechanism
Light source
Exposure
Scanning
Lamp power supply
Cooling of optics

Screws that must not be removed
Method
Halogen lamp (170 W)
Light source shift slit exposure
1st, 2nd and 3rd mirror shift
Lamp cord
Cooling of intake air using a fan
The 16 set screws of the CCD unit
A/D converter
board (ADB)
Screws that must

not be removed
Screws that must

not be removed
Screws that must

not be removed
Screws that must
not be removed
Note: 2 screws are located behind the ADB in the figure

above.
2-33
Removing and Reinstalling the CCD Unit
(4) Remove the eight set screws, then remove lens light
blocking cover 1.
Caution:

removed from the power outlet.
Caution: Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing
the CCD unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Set screws
Set
screws
Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, and
upper cover (center).
(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass
stopper plate.
Set
screws
Set screws
Lens light
blocking
cover 1
(5) Disconnect the connector (CN49).

(6) Remove the eight set screws, then remove the fan
mounting plate.
Connector (CN49)
Glass stopper plate
Set screws
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove lens light
blocking cover 2.
Set screws
Set screws
Set screws
Fan mounting plate
Light blocking cover 2
2-34
MAIN BODY
Replacing the Exposure Lamp
(7) Disconnect the two connectors (CN420 and 412).
Caution:
Be sure that the power cord has been removed

from the power outlet.
DO NOT touch the glass of the exposure lamp with

bare hands.
Caution:
Be sure to install the exposure lamp with the

manufacturer's mark facing the front side of the main
body.
The nipple on the exposure lamp must face the paper

feed side.
Be sure to check the image after installing the exposure

lamp. (For details, refer to the adjustmentsection.)
Electronic RDH
Connector (CN420)
Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, platen
glass and the upper cover (center).
(2) Move the exposure unit to the notch on the main frame
fitted on the paper exit side.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove mirror support
plate 2.
Connector (CN412)
(8) Remove the two set screws, then remove the CCD
unit.
Mirror support plate 2

Set screws
Reflector mirror 1
Exposure lamp
CCD unit
Spring
Set screws
Lamp terminal
(9) Reinstall the CCD unit in the opposite sequence to

removal.
(4) To prevent the exposure lamp from falling out, insert a

sheet of paper from beneath reflector mirror 1 and
wrap it around the exposure lamp.
(5) Remove the spring, then slide the lamp terminal to the
rear and remove the exposure lamp. (Lift out the lamp
while holding it with the paper that you wrapped around
it.)
(6) Reinstall the exposure lamp in the opposite sequence
to removal.
2-35
Removing the Exposure Unit

Caution:

Set screw
Connector
(CN384)
Caution:
Use a wire positioning jig when installing the exposure

unit. (For the method of installing this jig, refer to the
sub-section describing the method of installing the
exposure unit.)
Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing

the exposure unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Set screws
Wiring
securing plate
Set screws
Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, upper
cover (center) and the operation panel.
(2) Remove the seven set screws, then remove the front
door and disconnect the five connectors (CN10, 212,
213 383 and 414).
Exposure unit
Connector (CN414)
Connector
(CN383)
Set screws
Connector
(CN10)
Installing the Exposure Unit
Connector
(CN212)
Caution:
Use a wire positioning jig when installing the exposure

unit.
Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing

the exposure unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Procedure
(1) Insert the jig into the exposure unit mounting position
from the front.
(2) Slide the exposure unit to the paper feed side until it
touches the jig.
(3) Install the exposure unit on the optics wire using the
four set screws.
Connector
(CN212)
Operation
panel
Set screws
(3) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main body
frame on the paper exit side.
(4) Remove the set screw, then remove the wiring securing
plate and disconnect the connector (CN384).
(5) Remove the four set screws, then remove the exposure
unit.
Exposure unit
Jig
2-36
MAIN BODY
Installing the optics wire
(6) Pass the inner wire through the notch in the wire
stopper, reverse it at pulley 2, then pass it around the
inside of the V mirror pulley and around pulley 3, in that
sequence, and attach the lug terminal to the spring
securing plate. Temporarily secure the spring securing
plate with the screw.
(7) Insert the jigs into the exposure unit mounting positions
from the front.
Caution:
When winding the wire around the pulley, be sure to

run the wire tightly to ensure that it does not ride up the
side of the pulley.
Be sure to perform image adjustment after replacing or

reinstalling the wire. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Procedure
(1) Remove the optics unit.
(2) Move the V mirror unit to the paper feed side, then
insert the jig from the front (through the V mirror unit)
and secure it in place (refer to the illustration on the
right).
(3) The optics wire has exposure unit mounting pieces
installed on it. The position of each mounting piece
differs depending upon whether the mounting piece is
at the front or the rear. Use the mounting piece that is
at the shorter distance from the metal bead at the end,
as the rear mounting piece.
(4) Ensure that the end of the outer wire coincides with the
metal bead, and the end of the inner wire coincides
with the lug terminal. Place the metal bead midway
along the optics wire in the mounting hole of the drive
pulley, then wind five turns to the outside, and four
turns to the inside, starting from this point.
Pull out the outer wire in the paper exit direction from
the top of the drive pulley, and pull out the inner wire in
the paper feed direction from the top of the drive pulley.
(5) Secure the outer wire, after it has been wound, on the
wire stopper via pulley 1 and the outside of V mirror
pulley.
Exposure unit
Jig
Note: The wire stopper is provided with two grooves. Use the
outer groove for the rear side, and the inner one for the
front side.
Connector
(CN388)
Connector
(CN41)
Connector
(CN381)
V mirror unit
Front cover
Set
screws
Set screws
Set screws
Set screws
Front door
Set screws
2-37
Caution:
Ensure that the end of the outer wire coincides with the
metal bead, and the end of the inner wire coincides
with the wire terminal.
Pull out the outer wire in the paper exit direction from
the top of the drive pulley, and pull out the inner wire in
the paper feed direction from the top of the drive pulley.
(8) Loosen each of the screws that you temporarily

secured, then attach the spring to the spring securing
plate and secure it once again.
(9) Mount the other wire in the same way.
Five turns Four turns
Four turns
9
4
49
Metal bead
Five turns
10
5
Wire stopper
Front
Rear
Metal bead
Metal bead
Optics wire (rear)
Pulley 1
V mirror unit
11
6
Pulley
Drive pulley
Metal bead
Rear
Pulley 1
it
un e
re piec
u
s
po ing
Ex ount
m
Metal bead
Wire
stopper
Pulley 3
Spring
Optics wire (front)
Pulley 2
V mirror unit
Pulley 3
Wire stopper
Spring securing plate
13
8
10
5
Metal bead
Wire stopper
Set screws
Pulley Spring securing plate
2
Exposure unit
mounting piece
Lug terminal
Metal bead
Metal bead
Pulley
Optics wire (rear)
V mirror unit
11
6
Optics wire (front)
2-38
8
3
MAIN BODY
M12 (Optics Drive) Control

M12 (optics drive) is driven by the optics motor drive board
(OPMDB), and is controlled by the control board (CB).
Related signals are PS1 (optics overrun), PS2 (optics ADF and
EE), PS3 (shading), PS4 (paper supply restart), PS5 (optics
return), PS7 (optics timing) and PS8 (platen glass sensor).
Operation
Operation of M12
M12 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven using
a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing through the
windings is switched according to the position of the rotor
which is detected by a sensor (magnetic sensor) inside the
motor.
FB
2-39
Scanning operation of the exposure unit

Scanning speed
Magnification
Forward
Return
Other operations
During copying
When manual density has been selected
During a platen copy operation
Scanning speed
280 mm/sec (life size)
1520 mm/sec
Original placed on platen
Position of each sensor
Exposure unit
Exposure scan
Press copy button
Home position sensor of the exposure unit

If the exposure unit is not in the home position when the
main switch is turned ON, M12 rotates at low speed in the
reverse direction until PS7 (optics sensor) is turned ON,
thus detecting the fact that the optics unit is in the home
position.
During an ADF copy operation

Original conveyance
Shading correction read operation

At the position where PS3 (shading) goes ON, the light
reflected from the white reference plate installed at the rear
of the original table is read.
Exposure unit
1st original feed

Stop
2nd original feed
Stop
PS3
Exposure scan
Exposure scan
Home position
(PS7 and PS5 ON)
AES mode
Shading correction
read operation
Copy button pressed
Exposure unit
AES scan
Exposure scan
2-40
MAIN BODY
During an ADF copy operation (1-1)
Original conveyance
AES mode
Exposure unit
Original conveyance
Exposure unit
1st original feed

Prescan
Copy button pressed
Stop
Stop
AES scan
Exposure scan (rear half)
Exposure scan
2nd original feed

Stop
Stop
AES scan
Exposure scan (front half)
Exposure scan
Signals
During an ADF copy operation (1-2, 2-1, 2-2)

Original conveyance
1st original feed
Input signals
PS1 (PS1 > CB)

This is the exposure unit overrun detection signal.
[L]: The exposure unit is in the overrun position.
[H]: The exposure unit is not in the overrun position.
PS2 (PS2 > CB)

The brake is applied to M12 after the specified period
from when PS2 goes ON during the return scan of the
exposure unit. Also, when the ADF (1-1 mode) is used,
EE read starts when PS2 goes ON.
[L]: Exposure unit detected
[H]: Exposure unit not detected
PS3 (PS3 > CB)

This is the white reference plate read position detection
signal.
[L]: The exposure unit is in the white reference plate
read position.
[H]: The exposure unit is not in the white reference
plate read position.
PS4 (PS4 > CB)

The timer that determines the 2nd paper feed start
timing starts when PS4 goes ON during the forward
scan of the exposure unit.
PS5 (PS5 > CB)
This signal is used to detect the return position and also
the home position of the exposure unit.
PS7 (PS7 > CB)

This signal is used to detect the return position and
also the home position of the exposure unit.
PS8 (PS8 > CB)

This signal is used to detect whether the original glass
is set or not.
[L]: Original glass detected
[H]: Original glass not detected
Exposure unit
AES scan
Stop
Stop
Stop
Exposure scan
2nd original feed

Stop
AES scan
Exposure scan
Book copy mode

When manual density has been selected
AES scan
Exposure unit
Exposure scan (rear half)

Copy button pressed
Exposure scan (front half)
2-41
M12 DIR (OPMDB > CB)

This is the M12 rotational direction detection signal.
[L]: Reverse rotation (return operation)
[H]: Forward rotation (forward operation)
M12LD (OPMDB > CB)
[H] is output when M12 reaches the specified speed.
M12 MAG A/A' (M12 > OPMDB)
M12 MAG B/B' (M12 > OPMDB)
M12 MAG C/C' (M12 > OPMDB)
These are the output signals from the sensors (magnetic
sensors) contained in M12. OPMDB detects the
position of the rotor of the motor by means of these
signals, and switches over the M12 DRIVE A to C
output.
M12 FG (M12 > OPMDB)
This is a feedback signal from the rotational speed
sensor contained in M12. It is compared with the M12
CLK signal from the CB, and the output voltage adjusted
so that the feedback signal becomes the same as the
M12 CLK signal, thus controlling the rotational speed
of M12.
Output signals
M12 DRIVE A, B, C (OPMDB > M12)

This is the M12 drive signal. While M12 is rotating,
voltages are output sequentially from M12 DRIVE A to
C, and applied to M12.
The voltage from each output that is applied to M12
consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width
of this output changes according to the rotation
condition of M12, as shown in the figure, and as a
result the RMS value of the voltage applied to M12
changes, causing the speed to be regulated.
M12 CONT (CB > OPMDB)

This is the M12 ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: M12 ON
[H]: M12 OFF
M12 CLK (CB > OPMDB)
This is the M12 rotational speed control reference
clock signal.
M12 F/R (CB > OPMDB)
This signal is used to control the rotational direction of
M12.
[L]: Forward operation
[H]: Return operation
2-42
M12 BRAKE (CB > OPMDB)

This is the M12 brake control signal.
[L]: Brake OFF
[H]: Brake ON
M12 NCR (CB > OPMDB)
This is the M12 brake control signal.
M12 MODE 0, 1, 2 (CB > OPMDB)
This is the M12 rotational speed control signal.
Up to eight rotational speed modes are activated by
different combinations of these three signals.
MAIN BODY
Signals
Exposure Control
Input signals
L1 FB (DCPS2 > CB)

This signal informs the CB of the lit or unlit state of L1.
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF or broken
RL1 INHIBIT (DCPS2 > CB)

This signal turns OFF RL1 if an abnormality occurs in
the machine.
[L]: Abnormal
[H]: Normal
Output signal
L1 CONT (CB > DCPS2)

This is a control signal which turns L1 ON and OFF.
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF
L1 DRIVE1, 2 (DCPS2 > L1)

This is the L1 drive signal.
RL1 DRIVE (CB > DCPS2 > RL1)

This signal controls RL1.
This signal becomes [H] and turns off RL1 if an
abnormality occurs in the machine.
Power is supplied to exposure lamp (L1) by means of the CVR

(constant voltage regulator) in DC power supply unit 2 (DCPS2),
and is controlled by the control board (CB).
Operation
L1 light intensity control
The light intensity from L1 is determined by the output
voltage from the CVR circuit in DCPS2.
Rated output: 60 VDC
Protection from abnormality
Hardware timer circuit
If L1 remains ON continuously for at least 408 seconds
for some reason or other, the hardware timer in the CVR
of DCPS2 operates, turning OFF the main relay (RL1).
As a result, current to the AC loads including L1 is cut off.
Temperature fuse
If L1 exceeds a certain temperature, f1 (optics temperature
fuse) melts, cutting off the current to L1. (f1 melting
temperature: 121C)
2-43
Original Read Control
APS Control
The original is read by the A/D converter board (ADB) and the
CCD sensor installed on the ADB.
APS takes place as a result of the signal read by the APS

sensor being sent to the control board (CB) when the original
cover is opened and closed.
Related signals are PS45 (APS timing 1) and PS44 (book
detection).
Operation
The light reflected off the exposed original passes through a
lens to the CCD sensor. The analog voltages that correspond
to the input light intensity are A/D-converted in the ADB, and
output to the image processing board (IPB).
Operation
APS detection operation
APS detection is an operation that detects the paper size
according to the particular ON/OFF combination of PS41
(long), and PS42 (APS (inner)).
Original read operation

The original read timing is as follows.

When PS4 (paper feed restart) goes ON.
During an ADF copy operation

When the exposure unit is +2 mm toward the paper
feed side from the position at which PS4 goes ON.
Paper exit side
The APS sensor consists of LEDs and photosensors. APS

detection takes place as a result of the light emitted from
each LED being reflected off the original and received by
the photosensor.
Photosensor
LED
2-44
MAIN BODY
The relation between each sensor and the paper size is
shown below.
APS sensor
Paper size
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11R
8.5x5.5R
8.5x11
8.5x5.5
C
PS41
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
PS42
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
PS45 (PS45 > CB)

This is the original cover opening/closing detection
signal.
It activates or deactivates the APS function.
[L]: ON (APS function activated)
[H]: OFF (APS function deactivated)
ADF(DF-306)
APS detection timing

APS detection takes place when PS45 goes ON or PS44
goes OFF.
APS detection stops when PS45 goes OFF or PS44 goes
ON.
PS45 goes ON
PS44
Signals
Input signals
PS41 (PS41 > CB)

This is the paper size detection signal.
[L]: Paper is detected.
[H]: Paper is not detected.
PS42 (PS42 > CB)

This is the paper size detection signal.
[L]: Paper is detected.
[H]: Paper is not detected.
2-45
PS44 (PS44 > CB)

This is the original cover state detection signal.
This signal is used to detect the raised state of the rear
part of the original cover when a book or other thick
original is being copied.
When the rear part of the original cover is in a raised
state, PS44 is OFF, and [H] is output.
[L]: ON (APS function is activated)
[H]: OFF (APS function is deactivated)
AES Control
ADF mode (1-1)

The read operation takes place from the point at which
PS2 (ADF-AES) goes ON during the return scan of the
exposure unit, either while the original is being
conveyed through the ADF or after the original has
been placed in it.
AES sampling range (176mm-20mm) x L
AES control takes place during an AES scan as a result of the

CCD sensor reading the original density and selecting the
most suitable correction curve.
AES processing is done by the image processing board (IBP).
ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2)

The density of the original is read during the AES scan
after the original has been placed in the ADF.
AES sampling range (176mm-20mm) x (176mm-20mm)
Operation
AES detection operation

When the start print button is pressed, an AES scan
takes place, and the density is measured over the
range shown below.
AES sampling range
With APS detection: (document width-20mm) x
(document width-20mm)
Without APS detection: (176mm-20mm) x (176mm20mm)
2-46
MAIN BODY
WRITE UNIT
Composition
Index mirror
Cylindrical lens 2
Index sensor board
3rd mirror
Laser driver board 1
Polygon mirror
Cylindrical lens 1
f lens unit
Laser driver board 2
Collimator lens
unit 2
Polygon driver board
V mirror unit
Mechanisms
Mechanism
*1 Scan
Light source
*2 Positioning
*3 Laser beam combining
CY2 lens
Method
Polygon mirror
(Rotational speed: 16535 rpm)
Laser diodes (two)
(Output: max 15 mW)
Index sensor fine
adjustment prism
Polygon mirror
f lens unit
V mirror unit
3rd mirror
Stepping motor
CY1 lens
*1: Path of laser beam

The light emitted to each semiconductor is sent to the OPC
drum via the collimator lens, compression prism, fine
adjustment prism, beam combining prism, cylindrical lens
1, polygon mirror, f lens unit, V mirror unit, cylindrical lens
2, and the 3rd mirror. The dust proof glass is positioned
between the polygon mirror and f lens unit, and between
the reflecting mirror and drum.
Compression
prism
Beam
combining prism
Semiconductor
laser LD1
Fine adjustment
prism
Compression
prism
Collimator
lens unit
Glass cover
Index mirror
Index sensor
3rd mirror
Fine adjustment
prism
Semiconductor
laser LD2
OPC drum
2nd mirror
1st mirror
2-47
*2: Positioning
Each laser beam is positioned by the compression prism
and the fine adjustment prism.
This is adjustable only in the factory, not in the field.
Removing and Reinstalling the Write Unit

Caution:

Warning:
Do not energize the write unit when it is not in the

correct position.
Do not remove the cover from the write unit other than
to clean the polygon mirror.
*3: Combining the laser beams

The two laser beams are emitted at right angles with
respect to each other. The beam combining prism causes
them to be emitted parallel to one another.
Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, and
platen glass.
Screws
Board cover

(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the board cover.
(3) Remove the 13 screws, then remove the board
protection cover.
Screws
Screws
Board
protection
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
2-48
MAIN BODY
(4) Disconnect the four connectors (CN421, 422, 423 and
424) from the image processing board (IPB).

(8) Loosen the two screws, then pull out the write unit.
Image processing board (IPB)

Write unit
Connector
(CN424)
Connector Connector
(CN421)
(CN422)
Connector
(CN423)
Connector
(CN95)
Screws
(5) Loosen the four screws, then remove the upper cover
on the right side.
(6) Remove the eight screws, then remove the write unit
cover.
(9) Reinstall the write unit in the opposite sequence to

removal.
Cleaning the polygon mirror

Procedure
(1) Remove the write unit.
(2) Remove the five screws, then remove the write unit
cover.
Write unit cover
Screws
Write unit cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
2-49
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the polygon

mirror cover.
(4) Remove the screw, then remove board support piece

1.
(5) Remove the set screws, then pull out and remove the
electronic RDH.
Screws
Electronic RDH
Board support piece 1
Polygon mirror cover

Screws
Screw
(4) Immerse a cotton stick in a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl

alcohol and acetone, then use it to clean the eight faces
of the polygon mirror.
Caution: Take care not to scratch the polygon mirror when
cleaning it.
(6) Reinstall the electronic RDH in the opposite sequence

to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Electronic RDH

Caution:

Procedure
(1) Remove the top cover on the left side.
(3) Remove the eight screws, then remove the fan
mounting plate.
Connector (CN49)
Screws
Screws
Screws
Fan mounting plate
2-50
MAIN BODY
Signals
M5 (Polygon) Control
CB output signals
M5 CONT (CB > PMDB)

This signal controls the ON/OFF state of M5.
L: M5 ON
H: M5 OFF
M5 CLK (CB > PMDB)

This is a reference clock signal for PLL-controlling M5
in the PMDB.
CB input signal
M5 RDY (PMDB > CB)

This signal indicates the rotation condition of M5.
L: Specified rotational speed
H: If the specified speed has not been reached
PMDB input signal
M5 MAG A/A' (M5 > PMDB)
M5 MAG B/B' (M5 > PMDB)
M5 MAG C/C' (M5 > PMDB)

These are output signals from the position sensors
(magnetic sensors) contained in M5. The PMDB detects
the position of the rotor of the motor by means of these
signals, and switches over the M5 DRIVE A to C
output.
PMDB output signal
VMAG- (PMDB > M5)
This is the GND line to the rotor position sensors
(magnetic sensors) contained in M5.
M5 DRIVE A to C (PMDB > M5)

This is the drive output signal for M5. While M5 is
rotating, voltages are output sequentially from M12
DRIVE A to C, and applied to M5.
The voltage from each output that is applied to M5
consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width
of this output changes according to the rotation condition
of M5, as shown in the figure, and as a result the RMS
value of the voltage applied to M5 changes, causing
the speed to be regulated.
M5 (polygon) is driven by the polygon driver board (PMDB),

and is controlled by the control board (CB).
Operation
M5 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven
using a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing
through the windings is switched according to the position
of the rotor which is detected by a sensor (magnetic)
inside the motor.
This motor rotates the polygon mirror, causing the laser
beams from LDB1 and 2 (laser diode boards 1 and 2) to
be scanned in the axial direction of the drum. The speed
of the motor is maintained constant by PLL control.
M5 is powered by 24 VDC. The rotational speed is as
follows.
State of the machine
During copy
During idling
Rotational speed
High speed (16,535 rpm)
One of the following four speeds can
be selected using the 25 mode.
14,000 rpm *
11,024 rpm *
8,000 rpm *
Stop *
* If the item marked * is selected, the rotational speed of

M5 switches over after the lapse of the specified time
from the end of the copy process. The specified time can
be selected using the 25 mode.
* (15 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec, 120 sec)
2-51
Image Write Control
Operation
The analog image data from the CCD sensor is A/D-converted

by the A/D converter board (ADB), then sent to the image
processing board (IPB) where it is data-processed. The
processed image data is converted into a laser beam and
applied to the drum with control signals from the CB. There are
two lasers which are used to write two lines of image data in a
single scan. The write start position of each laser is detected
by the index sensor board (INDXSB). The electronic RDH (ERDH) can store digitized image data. Various editing functions
can be carried out based on this data.
Image processing
The following processing is done by the image processing
board (IPB).
Shading correction
Implementation timing
White correction
When the machine is switched ON
When the front door or the side door is opened
and closed
Every 1000 copies
Black correction
When the start print button is pressed
Brightness/density conversion
AES processing
Text/halftone dot identification
Filtering
Magnification change processing
Copy correction
Write density control
2-52
MAIN BODY
Direction of rotation of drum
When realtime output
When superfine mode is selected.
1st copy in either normal or fine mode with
platen mode or RADF (1-1) mode.
When PS4 (paper feed restart) goes ON
When data is output from the E-RDH memory
When the copy paper reaches the specified
position
During paper feed from the tray, LCT or ADU:
After the specified period from when PS18 (no
feed) goes ON
During bypass paper feed:
After the specified period from the start of
bypass paper feed
Laser beam position correction
Axial direction of drum
The index sensor detects the magnitude of the
error. This error is corrected by changing the timing
of the light emission from the laser.
Direction of rotation of drum
The index sensor detects the degree of
misalignment, and M40 (laser correction motor)
changes the angle of the fine adjustment prism of
laser LD1, thus adjusting the beam in the up/down
direction.
The following processing is performed by the E-RDH

(electronic RDH processing board).
Error diffusion processing
Data compression
The write operation takes place under instructions from the
CB after the above processing has been completed.
Write
The image processing board (IPB) sends image data one pixel
at a time to LDB1 and LDB2 in accordance with control signals
from the control board (CB).
LDB1 and LDB2 cause the lasers to emit light pulses of a length
corresponding to the image data. This laser light illuminates
the drum.
Automatic adjustment of laser beam intensity (APC)
The CB monitors the laser drive current at fixed intervals,
and maintains the light intensity at the correct value.
APC takes place at the following timing.
Before Dmax/gray scale correction
When the copy button is pressed
After each two copies during a continuous copy
operation
When the front door is opened and closed.
Note: MPC
MPC is the data (00-99steps) stored in the NVRAM in the main
body, which determines the LD output power to be adjusted
later by APC. It can be read out by 47-036, 47-037. MPC value
is sent from CB to IPB in case of step 1 or step 2 in APC above.
Signals
CB output signals
MEE V/V (CB > IPB)

This signal determines the scanning area in the sub
scanning direction during the pre-scanning operation
(EE control). The period during which this signal is [L]
is judged to be the scanning range.
M V/V (CB > IPB)

This signal determines the scanning range in the sub
scanning direction during the exposure scan. The
period over which this signal is [L] is judged to be the
scanning range.
M CLK CHG (CB > IPB)

This is the clock frequency switching signal.
[H]: Low clock frequency
[L]: High clock frequency
DCORR (CB > IPB)

The black data collection trigger signal is used when
shading correction is taking place.
I YOBI 1 (CB > IPB)

This is the spare input port.
RXA 0, 1 (CB > IPB)

This is the data that is transferred serially from the CB
to the IPB.
MTN V/V (CB > IPB)

This signal determines the patch output range in the
sub scanning direction while Dmax is being measured.
The period during which this signal is [L] is judged to be
the patch output range.
Write timing
Axial direction of drum
In this machine, the INDEX signal from INDEXSB
determines the laser write start timing for each scan in
the axial direction of the drum.
INDEX
Laser output
1
Laser output
2
Image area
1st scan
Symbol
a
b
bc
cd
de
2nd scan
Description
When laser goes ON during 1st scan
When index sensor goes ON
The timing at left is controlled by counting the
LD1 IRCLK and LD2 IRCLK signals. It differs
depending upon the paper size.
2-53
MAPC CAL (CB > IPB)

This is the APC and PWM calibration trigger signal.
MIND CHG (CB > IPB)
This signal selects the index signal.
[H]: External index signal
[L]: Internal index signal
CORR (CB > IPB)
The white data collection trigger is used when shading
correction is taking place.
RESET (CB > IPB)
This is the processing CPU reset signal (not used).
CB input signal
IP REQ (IPB > CB)

This is the processing board communications enable
signal.
INDEX (IPB > CB)

This is the write system index signal.
TXA 0, 1 (IPB > CB)

This is the data that is transferred serially from the IPB
to the CB.
MPR (IPB > CB)

This is the image processing board power supply
monitoring signal (connector check).
O YOBI 1 (IPB > CB)

This the spare output port.
LD2 C/S (IPB > LDB2)

This is the LD2 MPC signal.
LD2 VIDEO (IPB > LDB2)
This is the LD2 laser image data.
LD2 IRCLK (IPB > LDB2)
This is the LD2 APC clock signal.
LD2 INC (IPB > LDB2)
This is the LD2 MPC clock signal.
HLVL (IPB > INDEXSB)
This is the 5 VDC for monitoring power supply.
IPB input signals
LD1 ALM (LDB1 > IPB)

This is the signal that indicates an abnormality in the
laser drive current.
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
LD2 ALM (LDB2 > IPB)

This is the signal that indicates an abnormality in the
laser drive current.
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
M INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB > IPB)

This is the index signal for detection of main scanning
skew.
S INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB > IPB)
This is the index signal for detection of sub scanning
skew.
IPR (INDEXSB > IPB)
This is the INDEXSB power supply monitoring signal
(connector check).
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
LD1 LPR (LDB1 > IPB)
This is the LD1 power supply monitoring signal
(connector check).
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
LD2 LPR (LDB2 > IPB)
This is the LD2 power supply monitoring signal
(connector check).
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
IPB output signal
M40 PWR A (IPB > M40)

This is the M40 A phase drive signal.
M40 PWR B (IPB > M40)

This is the M40 B phase drive signal.
M40 DRIVE A/A' (IPB > M40)

This is the M40 A phase drive pulse signal.
M40 DRIVE B/B' (IPB > M40)

This is the M40 B phase drive pulse signal.
LD1 APC CONT 1, 2 (IPB > LDB1)

APC (laser light intensity automatic adjustment) of
LD1 takes place according to the combination of
these two signals.
LD1 C/S (IPB > LDB1)

LD1 VIDEO (IPB > LDB1)

This is the LD1 laser image data
LD1 IRCLK (IPB > LDB1)

This is the LD1 APC clock signal.

LD1 U/D (IPB > LDB1)

LD2 APC CONT 1,2 (IPB > LDB2)

APC of LD2 takes place according to the combination
of these two signals.
2-54
MAIN BODY
DRUM UNIT
Composition
Drum
Charge corona unit

Developing unit
PCL
Charge
corona unit
PCL
Cleaning unit
Separation claws
Separation claw solenoid
Drum
Developing unit
Cleaning unit
Transfer and separation corona unit
PSL
Mechanisms
*1
Mechanism
Carriage supply
PCL
Auxiliary separation
Drum
Method
Fixed rail
LED
Separation claws
Separation
claw
Swing clutch
The drum unit of this machine is an integral assembly

consisting of the drum, and also the charge corona
unit, developing unit, cleaning unit, toner recycle unit
and the PCL which are installed around the drum.
*1: Auxiliary separation
Three separation claws separate the paper from
the drum and prevent paper jamming. These
claws are pressed against the drum or removed
from it by the ON/OFF operation of the separation
claw solenoid (SD4).
Also, while the swing latch installed in the swing
block is turning one revolution, the separation
claws slide about 7 mm, preventing a specific part
of the paper from becoming dirty and also preventing
the drum from being scratched.
Separation
solenoid (SD4)
Swing block
2-55

Removing and Reinstalling the Drum Unit
Caution:
Drum cover

Caution:
The drum in this machine is more sensitive than the

drums used in previous machines. Before pulling out
the drum unit, be sure to cover the drum and store the
drum carriage in a dark place.
Be careful not to rotate the drum when installing or

removing the drum unit. If you rotate the drum in the
direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates
during a copy operation, you may damaging the
cleaning blade.
Conveyance lever
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, loosen the set screw, release the
lock plate of the toner supply unit, then pull forward the
toner supply unit and secure it in place.
Screws
(4) Remove the three screws, then slowly pull forward the
drum unit. (Raise the toner recycle unit and then
remove the screw at the center of the drum.)
Caution: There is a possibility of the drum rotating in reverse,
so retain the cleaner idler gear to prevent the drum
from rotating.
Toner supply unit

Screw
Screws
Toner recycle unit
Lock plate
(2) Release the conveyance lever.

(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the drum cover.
Drum unit
Cleaner idler gear
(5) Reinstall the drum carriage in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-56
MAIN BODY
Removing and Reinstalling the Drum

Caution:
Do not to touch the drum or the cleaning blade with

bare hands, or damage these parts.
When leaving the drum out, be sure to cover the drum

and store it in a dark place.
When reinstalling the drum, cleaning blade and guide

roller, apply setting powder to the entire surface of the
drum and also to the cleaning blade regardless of
whether or not the parts are new or old. In addition,
apply toner to both ends of the cleaning blade.
After applying setting powder to the drum, carry out the

following work before installing the drum unit on the
main body.
1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before
installing the drum to the drum unit, discharge the
surface of the detecting sensor and the Dmax
sensor on the control board by using a piece of
cloth moistened with alcohol, thus preventing the
toner from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing the drum in the drum unit, with the
charging corona unit and the developing unit
removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides of
the drum, then turn the drum one revolution. This
prevents setting powder from scattering onto the
charging corona unit, and other parts, and also
prevents image defects.
Do not drop the blade spacer which is inserted on the

cleaning blade axis on the back side.
When installing the drum, be careful of the orientation

of the drum. The end of the drum with the wider nonimage area is the front.
When installing a new drum, be sure to enter code 91

of the 47 mode and reset the drum counter. (For
details, refer to the adjustment section.)
Drum fixing coupling

Cleaner idler gear
Drum
(5) Reinstall the drum in the opposite sequence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Separation Claws

Caution:
Take care not to damage the drum when removing the

separation claws.
Be careful of the direction and position of the separation

claws when reinstalling the claws.
Do not touch the cleaning blade or the drum with the

bare hands.
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum carriage from the main body.
(2) Remove the drum from the drum carriage.
(3) Remove the spring.
(4) Remove the three screws, then remove the swing
block and switch clutch.
(5) Remove the separation claw unit.
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the charge corona unit, developing unit and
cleaning blade from the drum unit. (For the sequence
of removing these parts, refer to the charge corona
unit, developing unit and cleaning/recycle unit sections.)
(3) Remove the cleaner idler gear and the drum fixing
coupling.
Note: Before removing the drum, in order to reprevent the
toner from dropping, rotate the cleaner idler gear (B)
counterclockwise and remove the toner remaining
between the drum and guide roller. If the toner cannot
be removed, rotate the drum clockwise a bit, then
detach the drum keeping the toner on the place.
(4) Gently lift out the drum while holding it at both ends to
ensure that you do not damage the photosensitive
surface.
Separation claw unit
Spring
Swing block
2-57
Swing clutch
Screws
Removing and Reinstalling the PCL
(6) Remove the spring and the e-ring from the separation
claw unit.
(7) Remove the three screws of the claws (one screw
each), then remove the three claws.
Procedure
(1) Remove the charge corona unit. (Refer to the charge
corona section for the method of removing the PCL.)
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN20) from the drum board.
(3) Press inward the hooks at the front and rear of the PCL
cover, and remove the PCL.
Screws
Connector (CN20)
E-ring
Charging wire
cleaning motor (M7)
Separation claws
Spring
Drum
(8) Reinstall the separation claws in the opposite sequence

to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Separation Claw

Solenoid Press-fit Assembly
Procedure
(2) Remove the drum and separation claw unit from the
drum unit.
(4) Remove the two screws, then remove the separation
claw solenoid press-fit assembly.
(4) Reinstall the PCL in the opposite sequence to removal.
Connector (CN34)
Separation claw
solenoid press-fit
ass'y
Screws
(5) Reinstall the press-fit assembly in the opposite

sequence to removal.
2-58
MAIN BODY
PCL/PSL Control
Separation Claw Control
The precharge exposure lamp (PCL) and transfer sync

exposure lamp (PSL) consist of LEDs which are controlled by
the control board (CB).
The separation claws are driven by SD4 (separation claws),

and are controlled by the CB.
Operation
Operation
The PCL goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1

(main), and TSL with the drum motor (M4).
During the separation discharge, SD4 goes ON, causing

the separation claws to touch the drum in order to help
separate the paper from the drum.
Signals
Output signals
PCL CONT (CB > DB > PCL)

This is the PCL ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: PCL ON
[H]: PCL OFF
PSL CONT (CB > PSL)

This is the PSL ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: PSL ON
[H]: PSL OFF
Signals
Output signal
SD4 DRIVE (CB > SD4)

This is the SD4 drive control signal.
[L]: SD4 ON
[H]: SD4 OFF
2-59
Paper Guide Plate Control
A constant voltage is applied to the paper advance guide

plate in order to prevent toner from adhering to it.
Operation
ON/OFF timing
The paper guides go ON and OFF in synchronism with M4
(drum).
Applied voltage
-500 VDC
Signal
Output signal
GP CONT (CB > HV1)

This controls the voltage that is applied to the paper
advance guide plate.
[L]: Voltage applied.
[H]: Voltage not applied.
2-60
MAIN BODY
CORONA UNIT SECTION

Composition
Charge corona unit
Transfer and separation corona unit

Charge wire cleaning
motor (M7)
Charge corona unit
Drum board
Separation corona bridge
Charge wire cleaning knob
Separation
corona unit
Transfer
corona unit
PCL
Transfer and separation

wire cleaning motor (M8)
Mechanisms
*1: Cleaning the charge corona wires

The charge corona unit has a wire cleaner. The charge wire
cleaning motor causes the charge wire cleaning block to
move back and forth, removing dirt from the wires.
Mechanism
Method
Scorotron (DC negative corona discharge)
*1 Charge
Discharge wire: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.
Grid plate: stainless steel 0.1 mm dia.
With auto wire cleaner
DC positive corona discharge
*2 Transfer
Discharge wires: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.
Separation AC corona discharge
Discharge wires: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.
Charge wire
cleaning motor (M7)
block
Charge wires
2-61
Removing and Reinstalling the Transfer and

Separation Corona Unit
*2: Cleaning the transfer and separation wires

The transfer and separation corona unit has a wire cleaner.
The transfer and separation wire cleaning motor causes
the transfer and separation wire cleaning blocks to move
back and forth, removing dirt from the wires.
Caution:

Procedure
(1) Open the front door, and release the conveyance
lever.
(2) Remove the screw, then remove the transfer and
separation corona unit cover.

wire cleaning motor (M8)
Transfer wire cleaning block

corona unit
Transfer wire
Separation wire
cleaning block
Separation wires

Caution:
Screw
Conveyance lever
Removing and Reinstalling the Charge Corona

Unit

corona unit cover


(4) Remove the screw, then pull forward and remove the
transfer and separation corona unit.
Procedure
(3) Lift out the charge corona unit.
Screw
Chargecorona unit

corona unit
Connector (CN168)
Connector (CN21)
(5) Reinstall the transfer and separation corona unit in the

opposite sequence to removal.
(4) Reinstall the charge corona unit in the opposite
2-62
MAIN BODY
Removing and Reinstalling the Separation Corona

Bridge
(3) Remove dirt from the charge control plate by gently

dabbing it with a piece of cloth moistened with drum
cleaner, then remove any remaining dirt with a blower
brush.
(4) Reinstall the charge control plate in the opposite
Procedure
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit
(2) Push in the six hooks at the rear of the back plate while
grasping then with a pair of tweezers, and remove the
separation corona bridge.
Replacing Charge Wire Cleaning Block (B)

Procedure
(1) Remove the charge corona unit.
(2) Remove the charge control plate.
(3) Remove the two screws of the charge corona unit
(front).
(4) Lift out and remove charge wire cleaning block (B)
together with the spark arrestor plate (front).
Separation corona bridge
Spark arrestor plate (front)
Screws
Hooks
Charge wire
cleaning block (B)
Hooks
(3) Reinstall the separation corona bridge in the opposite

Cleaning the Charge Control Plate
Charge corona unit (front)
Procedure
(2) Remove the two springs, then slide the charge control
plate toward the charge wire cleaning motor and
remove it.
(5) Reinstall charge wire cleaning block (B) in the opposite

Narrow
Wide
Charge wire control plate
Charge corona unit

Spring
2-63
Replacing the Charge Wire
Replacing Charge Wire Block (A)
Procedure
(3) Remove charge wire cleaning block (B).
(4) Remove the screw, then remove the spark arrestor
plate (rear).
Procedure
(3) Remove charge wire cleaning block (B).
(4) Remove the charge wires.
(5) Turn the charge corona unit upside down, then remove
the stop ring, and remove charge wire cleaning block
(A).
Spark arrestor plate (rear)

motor (M7)

block (A) (rear)
Screw
Stop ring
(6) Reinstall charge wire cleaning block (A) in the opposite

(5) Remove the spring, then remove the charge wires.

motor (M7)
Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wire

Cleaning Blocks
Procedure
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit.
(2) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front).
(3) Lift out and remove the the transfer wire cleaning block
and separation wire cleaning block.
Charge wire
Spark arrestor plate (front)

block (A)
Spring
(6) Reinstall the charge wires in the opposite sequence to

removal.
Transfer wire cleaning block
Separation wire
cleaning block
Transfer and
separation
wire cleaning
motor (M8)
(4) Reinstall the transfer and separation wire cleaning

blocks in the opposite sequence to removal.
2-64
MAIN BODY
Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wires
Transfer/Separation Corona Maintenance
Procedure
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit.
(2) Remove the separation corona bridge.
(3) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front).
(4) Remove the transfer wire cleaning block and the
separation wire cleaning block.
(5) Remove the spark arrestor plate (rear).
(6) Remove the spring from each wire, then remove each
wire. Each wire comes away together with the support
rubber.
Spark arrestor
plate (front)
Spark arrestor
plate (rear)
Transfer wire
Separation
corona bridge
To enhance its performance and to help prevent arcing, keeping

this unit clean is important. If the cleaning block is not cleaned
properly (this problem was corrected in machines with serial
number 25SE04289 and above), the cleaning block can bind,
resulting in code F22-2 (cleaning wire trouble) or other related
codes such as F35-1, F36-1, and F43-2. Improper cleaning of
the corona wire will also result in poor separation.
The procedure below should be performed when poor
separation occurs, when code F22-2 occurs, and/or when the
machine is scheduled for a PM.
Caution: When cleaning the transfer/separation corona unit, do
not remove the transfer guide plate assembly (p/n 25SA-2660).
This part must be installed with a special fixture to correctly
position the part; this cannot be done in the field. An improperly
installed transfer guide plate may affect transfer/separation
performance.
Support rubber
Transfer wire
cleaning block
Spring
Procedure:
(1) Turn the copier OFF and remove the transfer/separation
corona from the main body.
(2) Check the position of the wire pressure pad of the
separation cleaning block assembly (refer to the
illustration). If the position of the pad is correct, go to step
(3). If the pad is not positioned correctly, replace the
separation cleaning block assembly.
Separation
wire cleaning
block
Separation
wires
Support rubber
Transfer and
separation motor
(M8)
(7) Reinstall the transfer and separation wires in the

opposite sequence to removal.
(3) Apply a very small amount of grease (Plas Guard No. 2,

p/n 00GR00020) to the slide groove of the wire pressure
pad.
Notes:
a) Do not disassemble the separation cleaning
block assembly when applying the grease to the
wire pressure pad. Also, do not apply grease to the
wire pressure pad of the transfer cleaning block
assembly.
b) Once this procedure has been performed, it doesn't
need to be repeated at subsequent PMs.
c) Do not perform this procedure on the transfer
cleaning block assembly or its wire pressure pad. If
this pad is positioned poorly, it is because of the
incorrect position of the separation cleaning block
assembly.
2-65
Revised 3/99
Charge Control
Transfer/Separation Control
S SHIFT (AC)
T SHIFT
High voltage unit 1 (HV1), which controls charging, operates by

means of control signals from the control board (CB), and
outputs a high voltage to the charge wires.
Transfer and separation is controlled by the CB and high

voltage unit 2 (HV2).
Operation
Operation
Transfer
A positive DC high voltage is used for transfer.
Separation
An AC high voltage is used for separation.
Charging
A scorotron charging method is used. 24 VDC input from the
CB is raised to a negative DC high voltage which is then
discharged.
Charging correction by means of the grid voltage
The grid voltage is output from HV1 to the charge plate.
Signals
Input signals
T SIG (HV2 > CB)

[L] is output when the transfer spark detection circuit
operates.
S SIG (HV2 > CB)

[L] is output when the separation spark detection
circuit operates.
Output signals
T CONT (CB > HV2)

This is the signal that turns the transfer corona unit ON/
OFF.
When this signal is [L], the transfer corona unit is ON.
T SHIFT (CB > HV2)

This is the transfer corona unit output level control
signal.
This signal controls the transfer corona unit output
level using analog signals from the CB.
Signal
Input signal
F SIG (HV1 > CB)

[L] is output when the spark detection circuit operates
and forcibly turns OFF the charge output.
Output signals
C CONT (CB > HV1)
This is the charge and grid voltage ON/OFF control
signal.
[L]: Charge and grid voltage ON
[H]: Charge and grid voltage OFF
C SHIFT (CB > HV1)

The charge corona unit output level is controlled by
means of analog signals from the CB.
C SHIFT output range
Charging output range
4 to 10 V
-600 to -900 A
Transfer shift output range

Transfer current voltage
output range
G SHIFT (CB > HV1)

The charge grid voltage output level is controlled by
analog signals from the CB.
G SHIFT output range
Grid voltage output range
Revised 3/99
4 to 10 V
-500 to -900 V
2-66
4 to 10 V
50 to 600 A
S CONT (CB > HV2)

This is the separation corona unit ON/OFF control
signal.
When this signal is [L], the separation corona unit is
ON.
MAIN BODY
S SHIFT (AC) (CB > HV2)
M7 (Charge Wire Cleaning) Control
This is the separation corona unit output level control

signal.
This signal controls the separation corona unit output
level (AC component) using analog signals from the
CB.
S SHIFT (AC) output range
Separation AC voltage
output range
4 to 10 V
4.0 to 5.7 kV
S SHIFT (DC) (CB > HV2)

This is the separation corona unit output level control
signal.
This signal controls the separation corona unit output
level using analog signals from the CB.
S SHIFT (DC) output range
Separation DC bias current
output range
4 to 10 V
0 to -400 A
M7 (charge wire cleaning) is driven by the drum drive board
(DCDB) via the drum relay board (DB). The DCDB is controlled
by the CB.
Operation
M7 is used to drive the charge wire cleaning unit. Also,
the drive voltage and rotational speed of M7 are as
follows.
Drive voltage: 12 VDC
Cleaning of the charge wire takes place if the fusing
temperature is less than 50C when the machine is
switched ON.
Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front side
of the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.
Home position
Rear
Cleaning (forward)
Cleaning (return)
Home position (forward

stroke)
Home position (return stroke)
Forward stroke of cleaning operation

The forward stroke takes place when the M7 F/R signal
from the CB is [L] (forward rotation) and also the M7
CONT signal is [L].
Return stroke of cleaning operation
The return stroke of the cleaning operation takes place
when the M7 F/R signal from the CB is [H] (reverse
rotation) and also the M7 CONT signal is [L].
2-67
Revised 3/99
M7 stop conditions
The M7 CONT signal becomes [H] and M7 stops when
the M7 LD signal becomes [L], regardless of whether M7
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front side
of the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.
Signals
Home position
Output signals
M7 F/R (CB > DCDB)

This is the signal that determines the rotational direction
of M7.
L: Forward direction (home position > rear)
H: Reverse direction (rear > home position)
M7 CONT (CB > DCDB)

This is the signal that controls the ON/OFF state of M7.
L: M7 ON
H: M7 OFF
M7 DRIVE (DCDB > DB > M7)

This is the M7 drive signal.
Input signal
M7 LD (DCDB > CB)

If M7 locks, this signal becomes [L], and the CB changes
the direction of rotation of M7, or stops it.
Rear
Cleaning (forward)
Cleaning (return)
Home position (forward stroke)

Home position (return stroke)
Forward stroke of cleaning operation

The forward stroke takes place when the M8 F/R signal
from the CB is [L] (forward rotation), and also the M8
CONT signal is [L].
Return stroke of cleaning operation
The return stroke of the cleaning operation takes place
when the M8 F/R signal from the CB is [H] (reverse
rotation), and also the M8 CONT signal is [L].
M8 stop conditions
The M8 CONT signal becomes [H] and M8 stops when
the M8 LD signal becomes [L], regardless of whether M8
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
M8 (Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning)

Control
Signals
Output signals
M8 F/R (CB > DCDB)

This is the signal that determines the rotational direction
of M8.
L: Forward direction (home position > rear)
H: Reverse direction (rear > home position)
M8 CONT (CB > DCDB)

This is the signal that controls the ON/OFF state of M8.
L: M8 ON
H: M8 OFF
M8 DRIVE (DCDB > DB > M8)

This is the M8 drive signal.
Input signal
M8 LD (DCDB > CB)

If M8 locks, this signal becomes [L], and the CB changes
the direction of rotation of M8, or stops it.
M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) is driven by the drum

drive board (DCDB) which is controlled by the control board
(CB).
Operation
M8 is used to drive the transfer/separation wire cleaning
unit. The drive voltage and rotational speed of M8 are as
follows.
Drive voltage: 12 VDC
Cleaning of the transfer/separation wire takes place if the
fusing temperature is less than 50C when the machine is
switched ON.
Revised 3/99
2-68
MAIN BODY
DEVELOPING UNIT
Composition
Developing regulating plate

Separation corona
bridge (upper)
Developing unit cover
Developing sleeve
Toner density sensor
(TDS)
Developing sleeve
Agitator wheel
Toner absorption duct
Flow of developer
Mechanism
Mechanism
Developing
Developing bias
Developer agitation
Agitator screw
The developer inside the developing unit is supplied to the

developing sleeve by the agitator wheel, and maintained at
a constant thickness by the developing regulation plate
(bristle height regulation plate). The developer remaining
on the developing sleeve is returned to the agitator screw.
Method
2-component developer
DC negative
Main agitation;
Auxiliary agitation
Drum
Developing unit drive
Developer
regulation plate
Agitator wheel
The drive for the developing unit is divided into the drive for
the developing sleeve and that for the agitating section.
These parts are driven by the developing drive motor (M3)
and the agitator screw motor (M35), respectively.
Agitator screw
Toner absorption duct
2-69
Disassembly/Assembly
Replacing the developer
Caution:
When replacing the developer, take care that dirt does

not become mixed with it.
If the developing sleeve is rotated, the developing

gear rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Never
rotate the developing gear in the clockwise
direction.
(1) The two screws of the developer regulation plate

(2) The set screw for adjusting the magnet angle
Developing sleeve
Developing gear
Removing and Reinstalling the Developing Unit

Procedure
(2) Release the developing push pressure levers (front
and rear). Then, disconnect the density sensor
connector.
(3) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
Procedure
(2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
(3) Release the hooks on the developing unit cover, then
lift up and remove the cover.
Developing unit
Hooks
Developing push pressure lever
(4) Reinstall the developing unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-70
MAIN BODY
(4) Tilt the developing unit, then rotate the developing
gear in the counterclockwise direction until all of the
developer adhering to the inside of the developing unit
and the magnet roller is discharged.
(8) Rotate the developing gear in the counterclockwise

direction, and confirm that the developer bristles along
the entire length of the developing sleeve.
Developing sleeve
Developing gear
Developing gear
Agitator gear
(9) Install the developing cover, then install the developing

unit on the drum unit.
(5) Add fresh developer evenly from the top of the agitator
screw.
(6) Rotate the agitator gear counterclockwise until all of
the developer enters the developing unit.
(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) until all of the developer has
been supplied to the developing unit.
Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Control

Board Unit
Procedure
(2) Remove the drum from the drum unit.
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the board
cover.
Developer
Screws
2-71
Board cover
M3 (Developing Drive) Control

(4) Remove the three screws, then remove the toner
control board unit.
(5) Disconnect the connector (CN19) from the toner control
board.
Connector (CN19)
Toner control board unit
M3 (developing drive) is controlled by the CB via the DC driver

board (DCDB).
Screws
(6) Reinstall the toner control board unit in the opposite

Operation
M3 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the developing
sleeve. M3 is PLL-controlled by feedback signals from a
speed sensor installed inside M3 itself, maintaining it at a
constant speed.
M3 goes ON after the specified time from when the start
print button is pressed, and goes OFF again after the
specified time from the completion of charge control.
Signals
Input signal
M3 LD (M3 > DCDB > CB)

This signal becomes [L] when M3 reaches the specified
speed.
Output signals

[L]: M3 ON
[H]: M3 OFF

signal.

This is the M3 rotational speed control gain switching
signal.
[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm
[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm
2-72
MAIN BODY
[5] M35 (Agitator Screw) Control
Developing Bias Control
M35 (agitator screw) is controlled by the CB via the DC driver

board (DCDB).
The developing bias is controlled by the CB via high voltage

power supply 1 (HV1).
Operation
Operation
M35 is a 24 V DC motor which drives the agitator screw and

the agitator wheel. M35 is PLL-controlled using feedback
signals from the speed sensor installed inside M35,
maintaining it at a constant speed.
goes OFF again when the last copy has been exited.
If the upper fixing roller does not reach the set temperature
within the specified time from the start of warmup, M35
goes ON/OFF in synchronism with M1 (main) until it goes
OFF at the completion of warmup.
The developing bias is applied to the sleeve in synchronism

with M3 (developing drive).
Signals
Output signals
Signals
Input signal

Output signal

[L]: M35 ON
[H]: M35 OFF
B CONT (CB > HV1)

This is the developing bias ON/OFF control signal.
When this signal is [L], the developing bias goes ON,
and a high voltage is output.
B SHIFT (CB > HV1)
This signal controls the output level of the developing
bias by means of analog signals from the CB.
B SHIFT output range
Bias voltage output range
2-73
2 to 8 V
-400 to -700 VDC
Toner Density Control
Signals
Input signals
TDS ANG (TDS > CB)
An analog voltage proportional to the toner density is
output.


Output signals
TDS CONT (CB > TDS)

This is the TDS output voltage adjustment signal.
Output voltage adjustment: 4.9 to 9.8 V

Toner is supplied when M10 is ON.
[L]: M10 ON
[H]: M10 OFF

Toner is supplied when M35 is ON.
[L]: M35 ON
[H]: M35 OFF
The toner density is controlled by the toner density sensor

(TDS), M35 (agitator screw), M10 (toner supply) and the CB.
Operation
Toner density detection
The TDS detects the density of the toner in the developing
unit using an L detection method, and outputs an analog
voltage signal that is proportion to the density to the CB.
The CB compares the detected voltage with the reference
voltage corresponding to the initial density of the developer,
and judges the necessity of supplying toner.
Toner supply operation
M10 is driven by 24 VDC supplied from the DC driver board
(DCDB).
When the power is switched ON

M35 (agitator screw) starts to rotate as soon as the
machine is switched ON, then after 3 minutes the toner
density is read. This density is compared with the initial
density of the developer, and if the density is low, toner
supply takes place.
During a copy operation

The relationship between the TDS output voltage and
the toner supply time is as follows.
Sensor output voltage
2 V or less
2 to 2.11 V
2.12 to 2.19 V
2.20 to 2.29 V
2.30 to 2.37 V
2.38 to 2.45 V
2.46 V or more
Supply time
0 sec
0.24 sec
0.48 sec
0.72 sec
0.96 sec
1.20 sec
1.80 sec
2-74
MAIN BODY
Dmax Control/Drum Jam Control
Every 1000 copies
Signals
Input signals
Dmax sig (TCSB > CB)

This is the output voltage of the Dmax value detection
sensor on the TCSB.
Reference voltage: 1.5 V
Dmax MONI (TCSB > CB)

This signal monitors the light reflected from the surface
of the drum (without toner), and corrects the voltage
applied to the Dmax detection LED (calibration).
Reference voltage: 6 V (reflection from clean drum)
DRUM JAM (TCSB > CB)

This signal detects a jam caused by paper wrapping
around the drum. If it is more than 4.3 V, the CB judges
that a jam has occurred.
Calibration takes place before Dmax correction.


Output signal
Dmax LED CONT (CB > TCSB)

DC voltage is supplied to the LED of PD1 by this line.
CB changes this voltage until Dmax MONI signal
becomes 6V.

[L]: M3 ON
[H]: M3 OFF

signal.

signal.
[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm
[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm

[L]: M4 ON
[H]: M4 OFF

DRUM JAM CONT (CB > TCSB)

This signal controls the ON or OFF state of the wrapping
jam detection LED.
[L]: LED ON
[H] LED OFF
Dmax control is done by the toner control sensor board

(TCSB), M4 (drum), M3 (developer sleeve), and so on. These
parts are controlled by the CB.
Operation
Dmax control is intended to control the maximum density
for each machine based on the reference level.
Contents of implementation
Latent images are created several times at the
maximum exposure, the images are developed while
the rotational speed of the sleeve is varied, then each
density is read by the PDI on the TCSB.
The rotational speed of the sleeve when the density
reaches the reference level is stored in memory as the
optimum sleeve speed, then subsequently developing
is carried out at this sleeve speed until Dmax correction
takes place next.
2-75
Revised 3/98
Gray Scale Correction Control
Contents of implementation
Exposure is performed while the laser exposure is
varied over several steps, and development is
performed at the sleeve speed resulting from Dmax
correction.
Subsequently, each density is read by PD2 on the
TCSB, and the toner density and the gradation
characteristics of the toner density is detected.
The gradation characteristics obtained here are used
as the correction values for the laser exposure amount.
Signals
Input signal
signal (TCSB > CB)

This is the output voltage from the gray scale detection
sensor (PD2) on the TCSB.


Output signal
LED CONT (CB > TCSB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for the gray scale
detection LED.
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF

[L]: M3 ON
[H]: M3 OFF

signal.

signal.
[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm
[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm

[L]: M4 ON
[H]: M4 OFF

Gray scale correction control is done by the toner control

sensor board (TCSB), M4 (drum), M3 (developer sleeve), and
so on. These parts are controlled by the CB.
Operation
Copy density
The gray scale characteristics of the toner density versus

exposure amount at the image forming section of each
machine is detected, and gradation correction processing
carried out in order to obtain a linear relation between the
original density and the copy density.
Original density
2-76
MAIN BODY
FM30 (Developing Suction) Control
24VDC
FM30 (developing suction) is controlled by the CB via the DC

Operation
FM30 is a 24 V DC motor.
It goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1 (main).
Signals
Input signals
FM30 LD (FM30 > DCDB > CB)

[L] is output when FM30 reaches the specified speed.
Output signals
FM30 CONT (CB > DCDB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for FM30.
[L]: FM30 ON
[H]: FM30 OFF
FM30 DRIVE (DCDB > FM30)

This is the drive control signal for FM30.
[L]: FM30 OFF
[H]: FM30 ON
FM30 H/L (DCDB > FM30)

This is the FM30 rotational speed control signal.
This signal is always [L].
2-77
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

Composition
Toner supply door

Toner box
Toner supply motor
Toner level detecting sensor (TLD)
Shutter
Toner conveyance screw
*2: Toner supply shutter
Mechanisms
Mechanism
*1 Toner supply
Toner level detection
Toner agitating
Toner box
*2 Toner leakage
prevention
When installing the toner cartridge, move the toner supply

unit forward. This causes the toner supply port to close,
preventing leakage of toner. When you return the toner
supply unit to the main body (normal position), the toner
supply port coincides with the developing unit.
Method
Screw conveyance
Piezoelectric method 185g50g
Agitator plate
Capacity 1330g
Toner supply shutter
*1: Toner supply
The rotational force of the toner supply motor is

transmitted via gears to the toner conveyance screw
and the toner agitator shaft, causing the shaft to rotate.
The toner that has been agitated by the plate installed
on the toner agitator shaft is supplied to the developing
unit.
Shutter
Toner supply port
2-78
MAIN BODY
(4) Close the toner supply unit, then remove the e-ring.
(5) Pull out the shutter toward the bottom, then remove the
toner supply unit.
Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Supply Unit

Procedure
(1) Open the front door, loosen the screw, release the lock
of the toner supply unit, then pull forward the toner
supply unit.
(2) Loosen the screw shown at top left of the figure, and
remove the screw shown at bottom right, then remove
the cover of the toner supply unit.
E-ring
Shaft
Screw
(6) Reinstall the toner supply unit in the opposite sequence to removal.
Screw
Toner supply unit cover
(3) Disconnect the two connectors (CN17 and 14).
Connector (CN17)
Connector (CN14)
2-79
Toner Level Detection Control
Toner level detection control is done by the toner level detecting

sensor (TLD) and the CB.
Operation
Toner level detecting sensor
A piezoelectric device is used as the TLD.
When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low, the
supply toner signal is output to the CB. As a result, a
message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VRD2) connected to OB2 (operation board 2).
Detection timing
The detection timing is as follows.
When the machine is switched ON
When the front door is opened and closed
During a copy operation
Signals
Input signal
TLD (TKD > CB)

When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low,
this signal becomes [L], and a message is displayed on
the LCD connected to OB2.
2-80
MAIN BODY
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT

Composition
Cleaning blade
Toner recycle screw
guide roller
Toner conveyance
screw
Cleaning blade
Toner conveyance screw
Mechanisms
Mechanism
Drum cleaning
Toner recycle
Toner collection
Method
Cleaning blade
(weight type)
Screw conveyance to the
developing unit
Toner guide roller

Removing and Reinstalling the Cleaning Blade
Caution:
Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet.
Caution:
Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade with bare

hands.
When installing the drum, the cleaning blade and the

guide roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and the
cleaning blade with setting powder, regardless of
whether the drum and cleaning blade are new or old.
Also, apply toner to both edges of the cleaning blade.
Once the drum has been coated with setting powder,

carry out the following work before installing the drum
unit on the main body.
installing the drum in the drum unit, discharge the
the surface of the detecting sensor and the
Dmax sensor on the control board by using a
piece of cloth moistened with alcohol, thus
preventing toner from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing the drum in the drum unit, with the
removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides
of the drum, then turn the drum one revolution.
This prevents setting powder from scattering onto
the charging corona unit and also prevents image
defects.
Take care that the blade spacer mounted on the
cleaning blade shaft at the back does not drop out.
Note: Before removing the drum, in order to prevent the

toner from dropping, rotate cleaner gear (B)
counterclockwise and remove the toner remaining
between the drum and the guide roller. If the toner
cannot be removed, rotate the drum clockwise a bit,
then detatch the drum keeping the toner in place.
2-81
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit.
(2) Remove the charging corona unit.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the cleaner
cover.
(6) Remove the screw, then remove the cleaning blade

from the blade mounting plate.
(7) Remove the blade spacer from the cleaning blade.
Cleaning blade
Cleaner cover
Blade spacer
Blade mounting
plate
Screw
Set screws
(8) Reinstall the cleaning blade in the opposite sequence

to removal.
(4) Remove the blade rotation shaft.
Caution: Take care that the blade spacer does not drop out.
(5) Lift out the blade mounting plate.
Removing and Reinstalling the Guide Roller

Caution:
When installing the guide roller, it is necessary to set

the drum accurately in the center position. When the
drum used in this machine is removed, the drive shaft
remains in the main body, hence it is necessary to
center the drum using the two jigs inside the drum
cover.
Blade mounting plate
Blade spacer
Jig (small)
Jig (large)
Blade rotation
shaft bearing
Drum cover
2-82
MAIN BODY
(4) Remove the left and right screws (one each), then
remove the left and right shaft positioning pieces.
(5) Lift out the guide roller.
When installing the drum, the cleaning blade and the

guide roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and
also the cleaning blade with setting powder, regardless of whether the drum and cleaning blade are new
or old. Also, apply toner to both edges of the cleaning
blade.
Once the drum has been coated with setting powder,

carry out the following work before installing the drum
unit on the main body.
installing the drum in the drum unit, discharge the
surface of the detecting sensor and the Dmax
sensor on the control board by using a piece of
cloth moistened with alcohol, thus preventing
toner from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing hte drum in the drum unit, with the
removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides
of the drum, then turn the drum one revolution.
This prevents setting powder from scattering onto
the charging corona unit and also prevents image
defects.
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit.
(2) Remove the charge corona unit, the blade mounting
plate, the developing unit and the drum from the drum
unit.
Note:
Before removing the drum, rotate cleaner idler gear
(B) counterclockwise in order to prevent toner from
dropping to the bottom of the unit, and also remove
any toner between the drum and the guide roller. If
the toner cannot be removed, rotate the drum
clockwise a bit, then detatch the drum keeping the
toner in place.
(3) Remove cleaner idler gear (B) and the two springs.
Screw
Guide roller
Shaft positioning piece
Shaft positioning piece

Screw
(6) Remove any toner that has dropped off the guide
roller.
(7) Install the guide roller and the two shaft positioning
pieces, then secure them temporarily with the two
screws.
Drum
Jig (large)
Clean idler gear (B)
Jig (small)
(8) Install the drum, then insert the centering jigs into both
sides of the drum.
(9) Install the two springs, bring the guide roller into
contact with the drum, then secure the guide roller
securely by fully tightening the two screws that you
secured temporarily.
(10)Install the cleaning blade.
(11)Rotate the drum one revolution.
(12)Remove the centering jigs from both sides of the drum
and store them inside the drum cover.
(13) Install the charging corona unit and developing unit.
(14) Install the drum unit in the main body.
Springs
2-83
PAPER FEED UNIT

Composition
2nd paper feed clutch

Bypass feed roller
2nd paper feed
Double feed prevention roller
Bypass feed roller
Feed roller
Upper tray
motor
Bypass plate
Paper feed motor
Paper feed roller
Lower tray
motor
Double feed
prevention roller
Paper feed roller
Bypass
paper feed
solenoid
Feed roller
Double feed prevention roller
Bypass
clutch
Paper feed
clutch (upper)
1st paper feed solenoid

(upper)
Conveyance
clutch

(lower)
Paper lift-up plate
Paper feed
clutch (lower)
Paper lift-up plate
Mechanisms
Mechanism
Paper stack
*1 Paper lift pressure
reduction
*2 Paper lift-up
Double feed prevention
*3 Cassette loading
1st paper feed
Mechanism
2nd paper feed
Method
Tray (2-stage)
Swivel roller
Paper lift-up plate
Torque limiter
Front loading
Feed roller, 1st paper feed solenoid
Multi tray paper

feed
*4 Paper size
detection
*5 Remaining paper
indication
2-84
Method
Registration roller, 2nd paper feed
clutch
Feed roller, bypass paper feed solenoid
Cassette detection switch
(upper cassette: tact switch,
(lower cassette: write paper size to
memory.)
Index sheet
MAIN BODY
*1: Swivel roller
*3: Paper up/down base release operation
The paper feed direction and the cassette loading direction

are at right angles to each other. Consequently, if the feed
roller is fixed, it will touch the paper when the cassette is
removed, resulting in possible paper jamming. To prevent
this, the swivel roller (paper feed roller) is designed so that
it drops down and touches the paper only when paper feed
is taking place.
When the tray is being removed, the projection on the right

side of the tray strikes the paper up/down base release
lever, causing the paper lift-up gear to be disengaged by
the gear coupling lever. As a result, the up/down base falls
under its own weight.
Paper feed swivel plate
Paper feed roller
Paper feed solenoid

Tray projection
Up/down
base release
lever
*2: Paper lift-up

When the paper feed tray is installed, the paper lift-up plate
is moved by the tray motor, paper feed idler gear and the
paper lift-up gear, causing the paper in the tray to be fed
automatically to the paper feed position.
*4: Paper size detection

The side guide and rear guide of the upper tray move,
causing the paper size detection knob to move as well. As
a result, the switch on the detection board is turned ON/
OFF. In this way, paper size detection takes place automatically.
Swivel roller
Paper
Paper lift-up plate

Paper size detection knob
2-85
*5: Remaining paper indication
The amount of paper remaining in the tray can be checked

by looking through the remaining paper indicator window.
The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the
up/down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused
to slide by a tension spring.
Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Feed Unit

Caution:
Procedure
(1) Open the front door; then pull out the upper/lower tray
in the forward direction.
(2) Loosen the five screws; then remove the right side
upper cover.
(3) Loosen the two screws; then remove the right side
lower cover.
Tension spring
Tray
Screws
Screw (behind
bypass feed)
Index sheet
Remaining paper
detection lever
Right side
upper cover
Screws
Right side lower cover
(4) Disconnect the two connectors (CN7 and CN144)

connected to the control board, and also the
intermediate connector (CN33); then remove the paper
feed wiring from the cord clamp.
(5) Remove the four screws; then remove the paper feed
unit.
Screws
Connector
(CN144)
Screws
Paper feed and

conveyance door
Connector (CN33)
Connector
(CN7)
(6) Reinstall the paper feed unit in the opposite sequence

for removal.
2-86
MAIN BODY
Removing and Reinstalling the Bypass Feed Base
(4) Remove each e-ring, then pull out each roller from the
shaft.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller (paper feed rubber
and paper supply rubber).
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the screw and bypass feed base shaft bearing, then remove the bypass feed base.
Bypass paper
feed MC
Paper feed rubber
Bypass feed base
Bypass paper feed roller

E-ring
Bypass feed base

shaft bearing
Paint mark
Paper supply rubber

Screw
Bypass feed roller
(6) Reinstall each rubber in the opposite sequence to

removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on each rubber.)
(3) Reinstall the bypass feed base in the opposite sequence to removal.
Replacing the Rubber of the Bypass Feed Roller/

Bypass Paper Feed Roller
Replacing the rubber (paper supply rubber) of the

bypass feed double feed prevention roller
Procedure
(2) Disconnect the connectors of the bypass paper feed
MC and the bypass no paper detecting PS (CN233
and 47).
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the bypass paper
feed unit.
Procedure
(1) Remove the bypass paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the bypass feed base.
(3) Cut the three wiring bands so as to free the wiring.
(4) Remove the e-ring, then remove the bypass feed liftup gear.
Wiring bands
Bypass no paper detecting PS

CN47
Wiring
Bypass feed roller
E-ring
Bypass feed top plate

Screw
Bypass feed lift-up gear
CN233
Bypass paper feed MC
2-87
(5) Remove the spring, then remove the e-ring, and

remove the actuator.
(6) Pull out the pin.
(7) Remove the four screws, then remove the bypass feed
top plate.
Paper supply rubber

E-ring
Double feed
prevention roller
Paint mark
Bypass feed bottom plate
Screws (at opposite side as well)
Pin
Guide plate
E-ring
(13) Reinstall the bypass double feed prevention roller

rubber. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark on
the rubber.)
Bypass feed top

plate
Spring
Actuator
Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Paper Feed

Roller and the Feed Roller
(8) Remove the four screws, then free the bypass feed
bottom plate.
(9) Lift the bypass feed bottom plate using the shaft side
as a pivot.
Procedure
(2) Remove the three screws, then remove the upper
cassette rail (front).
Shaft
Screws
Bypass feed bottom plate
Screws (at opposite side as well)

Cassette rail (front)
(10) Remove the e-ring.

(11) Open the guide plate to the bottom, then remove the
double feed prevention roller.
(12) Remove the paper supply rubber from the double feed
prevention roller.
2-88
Screw
MAIN BODY
Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Stage Paper

Feed Double Feed Prevention Roller (double feed
prevention rubber)
(3) Remove the two e-rings, then shift the left and right
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the upper
stage 1st paper feed roller unit.
Procedure
(2) Remove the upper cassette rail (front).
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the double feed
prevention roller unit.
Shaft
bearing
E-ring
Double feed prevention roller unit
Feed roller
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller
E-ring
Screws
(4) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft and
remove the double feed prevention roller.
(5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
(4) Pull out the three e-rings, the three shaft bearings, the
paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the
paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber (A)
and the double feed prevention rubber).
E-rings
Feed roller
Shaft bearing
(double feed
Shaft bearing
prevention rubber)
E-ring
Paint mark
Shaft bearing
Paint mark
Shaft bearing
Paper feed
reference
actuator
E ring
Shaft bearing
Shaft bearing
Shaft
Paper feed roller

(feed rubber (A))
Double feed
prevention roller
Double feed rubber
E-ring
(6) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to

on the rubber.)

on each rubber.)
2-89
Replacing the Rubber for the Lower Paper Feed

Roller and the Feed Roller
Procedure
(2) Remove the upper cassette rail (front).
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the lower
cassette rail (front).
Feed roller
Shaft bearing
(double feed
Shaft bearing
prevention rubber)
E-ring
Screws
Paint mark
Shaft bearing
Shaft bearing
Paper feed
reference
actuator
E-ring
Set screw
Shaft bearing
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller

(feed rubber (A))
E-ring
Cassette rail (front)

on each rubber.)
(4) Remove the three e-rings, then shift the left and right
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the lower
Replacing the Lower Stage Paper Feed Double

Feed Prevention Roller (Double Feed Prevention
Rubber)
E-ring
Procedure
(2) Remove the upper and lower cassette rails (front).
prevention roller unit.
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller

Shaft
E-ring bearing
Screws
2-90
MAIN BODY
Removing and Reinstalling the 2nd Paper Feed

Unit
Caution:

Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit, transfer/separation unit, and
paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the flywheel.
(4) Remove the screw, then remove the rotation stopper
of the 2nd paper feed clutch (MC3).
Caution: DO NOT touch the drum drive gear with a screwdriver when removing the screws.
E-rings
Paint mark
Screw
Shaft
Double feed
prevention roller
Rotation
stopper
Double feed rubber
Drum drive gear

on the rubber.)
Replacing the Intermediate Conveyance Clutch

Procedure
(3) Remove the e-ring, then remove the intermediate
conveyance clutch (MC8).
E-rings
Connector (CN86)
2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)
(5) Loosen the screw, then remove the 2nd paper feed
clutch and the gear. (Clutch and gear are one part.)
intermediate conveyance
clutch (MC8)
Screw
Gear
2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)
Connector (CN234)
(4) Reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch in the

opposite sequence to removal. (Do not forget to insert
the pin inside of clutch.)
2-91
Removing and Reinstalling the Upper Tray
(6) Remove the three intermediate connectors (CN42, 71

and 85).
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the upper tray, then remove the three screws.
(2) Withdraw the upper tray further, then lift it out.
Screws
Connector (CN42)
Connector (CN71)
Connector (CN85)
(7) Remove the two screws on the front and back, then
pull out and remove the 2nd paper feed unit.
Upper tray
Screw
(3) Reinstall the upper tray in the opposite sequence to

removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Lower Tray

Procedure
(1) Withdraw the lower tray, then remove the three screws.
(2) Withdraw the lower tray further, then lift it out.
Screws
Screw
2nd paper feed unit
(8) Reinstall the 2nd paper feed unit in the opposite

Lower tray
Screw
(3) Reinstall the upper tray in the opposite sequence to

removal.
2-92
MAIN BODY
Paper Feed Control
DCPS1
Operation
The 1st paper feed takes place as a result of the transmission

of drive force from M13 (paper feed) via MC5 (1st paper feed
(upper)), MC6 (1st paper feed (lower)) and MC7 (bypass paper
feed) to the respective paper feed rollers. At this time, the
paper feed rollers are not touching the paper, hence the swivel
roller and the by-pass plate are moved up and down by SD1
(1st paper feed (upper), SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)) and SD3
(bypass paper feed), causing each roller to touch the paper.
Control of each roller is done by the control board (CB). The
2nd paper feed is done by MC3. Related signals are PS11
(conveyance door), PS14 (registration), PS18 (no feed), PS19
(optics sync), PS20 (pre-feed (upper)), PS21 (pre-feed (lower))
and PS30 (bypass).
1st paper feed operation timing
1st copy start

Timing that is determined by the P counter from when
the charging corona unit goes ON
2nd copy start

After the specified period from when PS14 (registration) goes ON for the 1st copy
OFF timing
Specified count on the P counter
Intermediate conveyance control
The paper fed from the upper and lower trays is conveyed
by the rotational power of M13 to the 2nd paper feed section
by MC8 (conveyance). This conveyance section is also
used for feeding paper from the ADU and LCT. However,
it not used for bypass paper feed.
MC8 ON timing
When PS20 or PS21 is ON
MC8 OFF timing

After the specified period from when PS14 goes ON.
2-93
2nd paper feed control

The paper conveyed to the 2nd paper feed section stops
after the specified period from when PS14 goes ON (loop
formation).
MC3 ON timing
Direct exposure scan copying

(When supefine mode is selected.)
(1st copy in either normal or fine mode with
platenmode or RADF (1-1) mode.)
After the specified period from when PS4 (paper
feed restart) goes ON
Copying in the E-RDH mode

(2nd and subsequent copies in either normal or
fine mode with platen mode or RADF (1-1).)
(All copies in RADF (1-2, 2-1, 2-2) mode)
After the specified period from when PS18 goes
ON, or after the specified period from when MC7
(bypass paper feed) goes ON
During continuous paper feed from the LCT/ADU, the

CB checks the state of PS18 (no feed) when the paper
reaches the specified position past PS19, and if the
previous sheet of paper is still at PS18, the CB temporarily stops paper feed.
Paper feed restarts after the trailing edge of the previously fed paper has passed PS18 (no feed).
M13 FB (M13 > DCDB)
This is a feedback signal from the rotational speed
sensor contained in M13. This signal is compared with
the M13 CLK signal input from the CB, and the difference used to control the rotational speed of M13.
Output signals

[L]: SD1 ON
[H]: SD1 OFF

[L]: SD2 ON
[H]: SD2 OFF

[L]: SD3 ON
[H]: SD3 OFF
MC5 DRIVE (CB > MC5)

This is the MC5 drive control signal.
[L]: MC5 ON
[H]: MC5 OFF

[L]: MC6 ON
[H]: MC6 OFF

[L]: MC7 ON
[H]: MC7 OFF

[L]: MC8 ON
[H]: MC8 OFF
M13 DRIVE (DCDB > M3)

This is the power supply line to M13.
M13 CONT (CB > DCDB)

[L]: M13 ON
[H]: M13 OFF
M13 CLK (CB > DCDB)

This is the M13 rotational speed control reference
clock signal.
Signals
Input signals
PS11 (PS11 > CB)

This is the conveyance door open/close detection
signal.
[L]: Door is closed
[H]: Door is open
PS18 (PS18 > CB)

When the tray, LCT, or ADU is used, the image data
from the E-RDH determines the laser write timing.
Laser write starts after the specified period from when
PS18 goes ON.
Also, during LCT or ADU paper feed, when the paper
turns PS19 (optics sync) ON, the CB checks the ON or
OFF state of PS18, and if PS18 was turned ON by the
previous sheet of paper, the CB stops the paper
momentarily at the predetermined position after PS19
ON. After the paper has passed PS18, paper feed
restarts.
[L]: Paper is detected
[H]: Paper is not detected
PS14 (PS14 > CB)

The paper detection signal is used for detecting the
paper feed temporary stop position.
PS14 goes ON and outputs [L] when paper is detected
at the paper feed temporary stop position.
PS30 (PS30 > CB)

This is the jam detection sensor.
[L]: Paper is detected
[H]: Paper is not detected
PS20/21 (PS21/21 > CB)

This is the sensor which determines the operation
timing of MC8 (conveyance CL) (paper is conveyed as
far the 2nd paper feed section).
MC8 goes ON when PS20 or PS21 is ON.
PS19 (PS19 > CB)
2-94
MAIN BODY
Paper Up/Down Control
Output signals
M17 DRIVE (CB > M17)

[L]: M17 ON
[H]: M17 OFF
M18 DRIVE (CB > M18)

[L]: M18 ON
[H]: M18 OFF
When a paper feed tray is inserted, M17 (upper tray) or M18

(lower tray) goes ON for a fixed period, raising the bottom plate
in the tray.
Related signals are PS16 (upper tray upper limit detection),
and PS17 (lower tray upper limit detection).
Operation
ON timing
M17 or M18 is turned ON by the paper size detecting
sensor.
OFF timing
M17 or M18 is turned OFF by PS16 or PS17 going ON.
Signals
Input signals
PS16 (PS16 > CB)

This is the upper tray upper limit detection signal.
The paper in the upper tray is raised by M17, and when
it reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes
[L].
PS17 (PS17 > CB)

This is the lower tray upper limit detection signal.
The paper in the upper tray is raised by M18, and when
it reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes
[L].
2-95
Signals
Paper Size Detection Control
Input signals
PAPER SIZE RETURN 0 to 3 (paper size detection

board > CB)
This is the paper size detection switch ON/OFF signal.
b. Output signals
TEMP 1 (CB > paper size detection board)

These are the upper tray paper size detection timing
pulses.
TEMP 2 (CB > paper size detection board)

These are the lower tray detection timing pulses.
The size of the paper in the upper tray is detected as a result

of the matrix circuit in the CB detecting the signal from the
paper size detection board.
Operation
Tray (upper) paper size detection
The paper size detection board has four switches which
detect the position of the rear guide in the tray (upper). The
paper size is detected according to the particular ON-OFF
combination of these switches.
The relation between the state of the switches on the paper
size detection board and the paper size is shown below.
Paper size
11x17
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
8.5x14
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
8.5x11
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
8.5x5.5
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
8.5x11R
ON
ON
ON
OFF
8.5x5.5R
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Tray (lower) paper size setting

The size of paper in the tray (lower) is set in the 25 mode.
(Refer to the adjustment section.)
2-96
MAIN BODY
No Paper Detection Control
No paper detection takes place by PS12 (upper tray no paper

detection), PS13 (lower tray no paper detection) and PS15
(bypass no paper detection) which are controlled by the CB.
Operation
No paper detection control
When a paper feed tray or the bypass feed tray becomes
empty, PS12, PS13 or PS15 goes ON. As a result, the
corresponding LED on operation board 1 (OB1) lights, and
a message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VFD2) connected to operation board 2 (OB2).
Signals
Input signals
PS12 (PS12 > CB)

This is the upper tray no paper detection signal.
[L]: No paper in tray
[H]: Paper in tray
PS13 (PS13 > CB)

This is the lower tray no paper detection signal.
[H]: Paper in tray
PS15 (PS15 > CB)

This is the bypass feed tray no paper detection signal.
[H]: Paper in tray
2-97
LCT 1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition
Conveyance roller (upper)
LCT conveyance PS (PS144)

Feed roller
LCT paper feed SD (SD141)
LCT 1st paper feed CL (CL1)

No paper detecting actuator
Paper feed roller
Upper limit detection actuator
*1: Roller swiveling
Mechanisms
Mechanism
*1 Feed
1st paper feed
No paper detection
Paper size detection
Paper conveyance
Conveyance drive
To prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper
and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being
removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops
down and touches the paper only when paper feed is taking
place.
This operation takes place as a result of the LCT paper feed
solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.
Method
Roller swiveling
1st paper feed roller; paper feed
solenoid, paper feed clutch
Torque limiter
Photosensor
None
Roller conveyance
Timing belt
Feed roller
LCT paper feed
SD (SD141)
Paper feed roller
2-98
MAIN BODY

Removing and Reinstalling the 1000 Tray/
Conveyance Section
Caution:
Shaft bearing
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then withdraw the LCT1000 tray/
LCT1500 tray in the forward direction.
(2) Loosen the four screws, then remove the right side
upper cover.
(3) Loosen the two screws, then remove the right side
lower cover.
(4) Disconnect the two intermediate connectors (CN722,
728).
(5) Remove the four screws, then remove the LCT1000
paper feed/conveyance section.
LCT1000 tray paper feed/
conveyance section
E-ring
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Paper feed roller
CN722
LCT1500 tray
Feed roller
Shaft bearing
(double feed
Shaft bearing
prevention rubber)
E-ring
CN728
Paint mark
Shaft bearing
Screws
LCT 1000 tray
Shaft bearing
Paper feed
reference
actuator
E-ring
(6) Reinstall the 1000 tray paper feed/conveyance section in the opposite sequence to removal.
Shaft bearing
Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller and

the Feed Roller
Shaft bearing
Procedure
(1) Remove the LCT1000 paper feed/conveyance section.
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the paper
feed roller unit.
Paper feed roller

(feed rubber (A))
E-ring

on each rubber.)
2-99
Replacing the Rubber of the Double Feed

Prevention Roller
(4) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft, and
Procedure
(1) Remove the four screws, then remove the LCT1000
paper/conveyance section.
(2) Loosen the two screws, then remove the LCT conveyance door.
E-ring
Paint mark
Screw
Double feed
prevention roller
roller
LCT conveyance door

on the rubber, and also the direction in which you push
down the double feed prevention roller unit.)
Screw
prevention roller unit. (When reinstalling the roller,
push it downward and secure it.)
Push-down
direction
Screws
Shaft
Screws
2-100
MAIN BODY
1000 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper

Detection Control
CL1
Signals
Input signals
M140 brake state signal

[H]: Brake ON
[L]: Brake OFF
PS141 (PS141 > DCDB > CB)

This is the no paper detection signal from the 1000
tray.
[H]: No paper in tray
[L]: Paper in tray

This is the paper passage detection signal from the
1000 tray conveyance section.
This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the

This is the 1st paper feed detection signal from the
1000 tray.
This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
CL1
CL1 CONT
Output signals

[H]: M140 OFF
[L]: M140 ON
M140 PLL (CB > DCDB > M140)

This is the PLL control clock signal for M140.
CL1 CONT (CB > DCDB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for CL1.
[H]: CL1 OFF
[L]: CL1 ON
SD141 CONT (CB > DCDB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for SD141.
[H]: SD141 OFF
[L]: SD141 ON
CL1 DRIVE (DCDB > CL1)

This is the ON/OFF drive signal for CL1.
[H]: CL1 OFF
[L]: CL1 ON
SD141 CONT (DCDB > SD141)

This is the ON/OFF drive signal for SD141.
[H]: SD141 OFF
[L]: SD141 ON
The 1st paper feed from the 1000 tray takes place as a result
of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper
feed) by means of CL1 (LCT 1st paper feed (1000)). The paper
feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD141 (LCT
1st paper feed (1000)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller
into contact with the paper.
M140, CL1 and SD141 are driven by the DC driver board
(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB. Related signals are
PS141 (LCT no paper detection (1000)), PS144 (LCT
conveyance (1000)), and PS210 (LCT pre-feed (1000)).
Operation
1st paper feed operation timing
Start of paper feed for 1st copy

Timing determined by the P counter from when the
charging corona unit goes ON
Start of paper feed for 2nd copy

After the specified period from when PS14 (registration) goes ON during the 1st copy operation.
OFF timing
When the copy paper in the LCT1000 tray runs out, PS141
goes ON, the corresponding LED on operation board 1
(OB1) lights, and a message appears on the LCD (VFD1,
VFD2) connected to operation board 2 (OB2).
2-101
LCT 1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition
Paper feed roller

Horizontal conveyance rollers
LCT paper feed SD (SD140)
No paper detection actuator

Feed roller
Upper limit detection actuator

LCT 1st paper feed CL (CL2)
*1: Roller swiveling
Mechanisms
Mechanism
*1 Feed
1st paper feed
No paper detection
Paper size detection
Paper conveyance
Conveyance drive
To prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper
and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being
removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops
down and touches the paper only when paper feed is taking
place.
This operation is takes place as a result of the LCT paper
feed solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.
Method
Roller swivel
1st paper feed roller, paper feed
solenoid
Torque limiter
Photo sensor
None
Roller conveyance
Timing belt
Paper feed roller
Feed roller
LCT paper feed SD
(SD140)
2-102
MAIN BODY
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the upper

Removing and Reinstalling the 1500 Tray Paper
Feed/Conveyance Section
Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the LCT1000 tray/LCT1500 tray in the forward direction.
(2) Withdraw the LCT1500 tray paper feed/conveyance
section in the forward direction, then withdraw it further
and lift it out.
Shaft bearing
Feed roller
E-ring
LCT1500 tray
conveyance section
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller
E-ring
(3) Reinstall the 1500 tray paper feed/conveyance section in the opposite sequence to removal.
Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller and

Feed Roller
Feed roller
Shaft bearing
(double feed
Shaft bearing
prevention rubber)
E-ring
Procedure
(1) Remove the LCT1500 paper feed/conveyance section.
(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the conveyance
cover.
Paint mark
Shaft bearing
Shaft bearing
Paper feed
reference
actuator
E-ring
Screw
Conveyance cover
Shaft bearing
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller

(feed rubber (A))
E-ring

on each rubber.)
Screw
2-103
Replacing the Rubber of the Double Feed

Prevention Roller
Procedure
(1) Remove the LCT 1500 paper feed/conveyance section.
prevention roller. (When reinstalling the roller unit,
push it against the rear and secure it.)
1500 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper

Detection Control
CL2
CL2
CL2 CONT
Screws
Pushing direction
E-ring
Paint mark
The 1st paper feed from the 1500 tray takes place as a result
of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper
feed) by means of CL2 (LCT 1st paper feed (1500)). The paper
feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD140 (LCT
1st paper feed (1500)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller
into contact with the paper.
M140, CL2 and SD140 are driven by the DC driver board
(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB. Related signals are
PS140 (LCT no paper detection (1500)), PS146 (LCT
conveyance (1500)), and PS200 (LCT pre-feed (1500)).
Operation
Double feed
prevention roller
roller
Shaft
a. 1st paper feed operation timing
Start of paper feed for 1st copy

Timing determined by the P counter from when the
charging corona unit goes ON
Start of paper feed for 2nd copy

Specified period after PS14 (registration) goes ON
during the 1st copy operation
OFF timing

on the rubber, and also the direction in which you push
the double feed prevention roller unit.)
2-104
MAIN BODY

When the copy paper in the LCT1500 tray runs out, PS140
goes ON, the corresponding LED on operation board 1
(OB1) lights, and a message appears on the LCD (VFD1,
VFD2) connected to operation board 2 (OB2).
2. Signals
a. Input signals
M140 BRAKE (M140 > DCDB > CB)

This is the M140 brake state signal.
[H]: Brake ON
[L]: Brake OFF

This is the no paper detection signal from the 1500
tray.
[H]: No paper in tray
[L]: Paper in tray

This is the paper passage detection signal from the
This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the

This is the 1st paper feed detection signal from the
1500 tray.
This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
Output signals

[H]: M140 OFF
[L]: M140 ON
M140 PLL (CB > DCDB > M140)

CL2 CONT (CB > DCDB)

[H]: CL2 OFF
[L]: CL2 ON

This is the ON/OFF control signal for SD140.
[H]: SD140 OFF
[L]: SD140 ON
Rev. 4/96
2-105
CL2 DRIVE (DCDB > CL2)

[H]: CL2 OFF
[L]: CL2 ON
SD140 CONT (DCDB > SD140)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for SD140.
[H]: SD140 OFF
[L]: SD140 ON
LCT PAPER TRAY

Composition
Side guide
Rear stopper
Tray
Wire (B)
1500 tray
Wire (A)
Auxiliary wire
Tray
Tray motor
(M141, M142)
Front cover
Tray
Rear stopper
Remaining paper
indicator window
Wire (B)
Coupling gear
Drive pulley
Wire (A)
Auxiliary drive pulley

Drive pulley
Side guides
Remaining paper indicator window
Front cover
1000 tray
Mechanisms
Mechanism
Paper lift-up
*1 Paper lift-up
Cassette loading
*2 Remaining paper indication
*2: Remaining paper indication

The LCT can hold a large amount of paper; it has a
remaining paper indicator window to enable the user to
obtain a rough indication of the amount of paper remaining
in the tray.
The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the
up/down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused
to slide by a tension spring.
Method
Tray 1 stage
Wire drive
Front loading
Index sheet
*1: Paper lift-up

The paper tray is suspended by four up/down drive wires
(wires (A) and (B) two each).
When paper is supplied to the tray, the tray drops under the
weight of the paper, however the weight of the paper is
balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive spring.
When the paper tray is loaded, the tray motor (M402, M403)
rotates, and the wire is wound up on the drive reel, causing
the tray to rise.
When the paper tray is withdrawn from the pedestal, the
coupling between the tray and the tray drive section is
released, hence the tray falls to a position where the weight
of the paper is balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive
spring.
Index sheet
Remaining paper
indication lever
Tray
Tension spring
2-106
MAIN BODY

Removing and Reinstalling the 1000 Tray
Removing and Reinstalling the 1500 tray
Caution:
Caution:
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the 1500 tray, then remove the four screws.
(2) Lift out the 1500 tray.
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the 1000 tray, then remove the four screws.
(2) Lift out the 1000 tray.
Screws
1000 tray
Screws
1500 tray
Screws
(3) Reinstall the 1000 tray in the opposite sequence to

removal. In this case, however, install the front left and
right screws first.
Screws
(3) Reinstall the 1500 tray in the opposite sequence to

removal. In this case, however, install the front left and
right screws first.
2-107
Replacing the Wires
Caution:
After replacing or reinstalling the wires, move the tray

up and down by hand, and confirm that it rises and falls
smoothly.
Take care that wires do not cross each other or ride up

the sides of the pulleys.
Adjust the tilt of the tray after installing the wires.
Caution: The method of installing the tray up/down drive

wires is the same for both the front and rear. For this
reason, the description of the method of replacing
the wires is based on the rear side only.
Install the front wires in exactly the same way as the
rear wires.
Method of removing the wires
Remove the
restraining covers.
Wire restraining cover
Wire (B)
Wire (A)
Wire (B)
Tray
Auxiliary drive spring

Wire (A)
Auxiliary wire
2
4
Wire (A)
Wire (A)
Remove the e-ring,

then withdraw the
drive pulley.
Detach the auxiliary wire

from the auxiliary drive
spring.
Auxiliary wire
Remove the wire

protection cover.
Drive pulley
Set screws
E-ring
Wire protection cover
2-108
MAIN BODY
Wire length
3430.4mm (1500 tray)
2360.4mm (1000 tray)
Wire (A)
5430.4mm (1500 tray)
3550.4mm (1000 tray)
Wire (B)
2140.5mm (2500 tray)
1570.5mm (1000 tray)
Auxiliary wire
Method of installing the wires
Pass wires (A)

and (B) through Wire (A) Wire (B)
the grooves in
the pulleys,
then install the
wire restraining
covers.
Pass wire (B)

through the groove
in the pulley, then
install the wire
restraining cover.
Wire (B)
Wire restraining
cover
Pass wires (A) and

(B) at the front side
over the wire
adjustment pieces.
Wire (B)
Wire (A)
Wire restraining cover

Wire adjustment
piece
Wire (B)
Tray
Wire (A) Wire (B)
Pass the wires

through here.
Auxiliary drive
spring
Wire (A)
Auxiliary
wire
Auxiliary wire
Attach the wire to the

auxiliary drive spring.
8
Wire (A)
Push in the drive pulley,

and secure it with the ering.
Install the wire

protection cover.
Wire (B)
Auxiliary wire
Drive pulley
Set screws
6
E-ring
Wind the auxiliary wire

clockwise around the
drive pulley. (1000 tray:
4 turns; 1500 tray: 5 turns)
2-109
Wire protection cover
Signals
Tray Up/Down Control
Input signals

This is the 1500 tray upper limit detection signal.
This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is detected.
TRAY (15) ADD (MS141 > DCDB > CB)

This is the 1500 tray loaded detection signal.
This signal is the TMP4 signal which is input via MS141
when the tray is detected.

This is the 1000 tray upper limit detection signal.
This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is reached.
TRAY (10) ADD (MS142 > DCDB > CB)
This is the 1000 tray loaded detection signal.
This signal is the TM4 signal which is input via MS142
when the tray is detected.

This is the LCT conveyance door open/close detection
signal.
[H]: LCT conveyance door open
[L]: LCT conveyance door closed
Output signals

[H]: M141 OFF
[L]: M141 ON

[H]: M142 OFF
[L]: M142 ON
TMP4 (CB > DCDB > MS141, MS142)

This is a pulse signal which detects the fact that the
1500 tray and the 1000 tray are loaded.

This is the M141 ON/OFF drive signal.
[H]: M141 OFF
[L]: M141 ON

[H]: M142 OFF
[L]: M142 ON
The tray rises as a result of the transmission of the rotational

force of M141 (tray (1500)) and M142 (tray (1000)) by means
of the drive wires (four wires each).
M141 and M142 are driven by the DC driver board (DCDB)
which is controlled by the CB.
Related signals are MS141 (LCT interlock (1500)), MS142
(LCT interlock (1000)), PS142 (LCT upper limit detection
(1500)), PS143 (LCT upper limit detection (1000)), and PS160
(LCT conveyance open/close detection).
Operation
When MS141 or MS142 detects a paper tray, M141 or
M142 goes ON, causing the corresponding tray to rise.
The tray rises until PS142 or PS143 detects the upper limit
of the paper and goes ON, then M141 or M142 goes OFF,
and the tray stops rising.
The paper is fed until PS142 or PS143 goes OFF, then
M414 or M142 goes ON once again, and the tray rises.
The lowering operation of both the 1500 tray and 1000 tray
takes place mechanically.
2-110
MAIN BODY
ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition
Paper exit roller

Selector guide
ADU gate
solenoid
(SD152)
ADU cooling fan
(M152)
ADU conveyance open/close door
Conveyance
roller
Timing belt
Mechanisms
Mechanism
*1 Paper path selection
Paper conveyance
Method
Selector guide
Conveyance roller
Selector guide
*1: Selecting the paper path

The paper that is exited from the fusing unit of the main
body is either exited from the machine or sent to the ADU
paper exit/conveyance section depending upon the setting
of the selector guide.
The selector guide operates according to the ON/OFF state
of the ADU gate solenoid (SD152).
ADU gate
solenoid (SD152)
2-111
Selector Guide
Removing the ADU Paper Exit Conveyance

Section
Caution:
Procedure
(1) Remove the cover at top left of the main body.
(2) Disconnect the two connectors (CN94, 530), then
remove the six screws, and remove the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section.
SD 152 CONT
PS158
A
Paper exit/
conveyance
section
The selector guide is driven by SD152 (ADU gate).

SD152 is driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is
controlled by the CB .
Related signals are PS157 (ADU gate) and PS158 (ADU
conveyance door open/close detection).
Operation
Screws
Selector guide control

When the face side copy is made, SD152 goes ON after the
specified time from when MC3 (2nd paper feed) goes ON,
causing the selector guide to open. As a result, the paper
exited from the fusing unit is conveyed to the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section.
SD152 goes OFF after the specified time from when PS25
(paper exit) detects the trailing edge of the paper and goes
ON, then the selector guide closes.
Paper exit/conveyance control
The paper exit roller and conveyance roller are driven by
M1 (main), and the paper exited from the fusing unit is
conveyed to the ADU paper exit/conveyance section.
CN94
CN530
View in A direction
Signals
Input signals

This is the signal which detects the passage of paper
through the entrance of the stacker.
This signal becomes [H] when paper is detected.
2-112
MAIN BODY
This is the signal which detects the open/closed state
of the ADU conveyance door.
[H]: ADU conveyance door open
[L]: ADU conveyance door closed
ADU DB output signals

This is the SD152 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: SD152 OFF
[L]: SD152 ON
M152 (ADU Cooling Fan) Control
M152 (ADU cooling fan) is installed in the paper exit/conveyance section in order to prevent curling of the paper.
M152 is driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is
controlled by the CB.
Operation
ON timing
After the specified time from when MC3 (2nd paper feed)
goes ON
OFF timing
When M4 (drum) goes OFF
Signals
Input signals
M152 LD (M152 > DC DB > CB)

Output signals
M152 CONT (CB > DC DB)

[L]: M152 ON
[H]: M152 OFF
M152 DRIVE (DC DB > M152)

[L]: M152 ON
[H]: M152 OFF
2-113
ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION

Composition
Conveyance guide plate (lower)
Reversal roller (at bottom)
Paper exit roller

ADU timing clutch (CL153)
Paper exit roller
Paper exit rollers

Conveyance guide plate (upper)
ADU paper feed motor (M151)

ADU paper feed clutch (CL151)
Paper exit rollers
ADU reversal clutch (CL152)
Mechanisms
*1
*2
*3
Mechanism
Paper feed
Paper path
Paper conveyance
Conveyance drive
Jam clearance
*1: Non-stack paper feed mechanism

The paper in the paper exit/conveyance section is fed to the
paper feed unit by the conveyance rollers. When the
trailing edge of the paper is completely inside the paper
feed unit, it is exited to the conveyance unit by the reversal
roller without being stacked. At this time, the paper is exited
from the trailing edge side; the face side and reverse
side are inverted in the conveyance unit.
Method
Non-stack selection
Selector gate
Conveyance roller (one)
Reversal roller (one)
Paper exit rollers (four)
Timing belts (four) + gear
Selector gate, conveyance
guide plate (B), opening/
closing of conveyance
guide plate (upper)/(lower)
Conveyance roller
Face side
Drum
Reversal roller
2-114
Reverse side
MAIN BODY
*2: Paper path selection
Selector gate
The selector gate switches the path of the paper exit/

conveyance between the paper advance path from the
paper exit/conveyance section to the paper feed section,
and the paper exit path from the paper feed section to the
conveyance section. The selector gate does not have a
drive mechanism. The paper path is determined by the
shape of leading edge of the gate.
During paper feed
Selector gate
Selector gate
Paper feed unit
Paper
During paper exit
Paper
Conveyance guide plate (B)
Selector gate
Conveyance unit
Conveyance guide plate (upper)
*3: Jam clearance mechanism

There is a jam clearance mechanism on each of the
selector gate, the paper feed unit and the conveyance unit.
Jammed paper can be removed by opening and closing the
selector gate, conveyance guide plate (B) or conveyance
guide plate (upper)/(lower), depending upon where the jam
occurred.
Conveyance guide plate (lower)
2-115
Disassembly and Assembly
Paper Feed/Reversal Control
Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Feed/

Conveyance Section
Caution:
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the ADU unit, then remove the four screws.
(2) Withdraw the ADU unit completely and lift it out.
Screws
ADU paper feed/

conveyance section
Screws
(2) Reinstall the paper feed/conveyance section in the

opposite sequence to removal. In this case, however,
install the front left and right set screws first.
The paper feed and reversal operations take place as a result

of the transmission of rotational force from M151 (ADU paper
feed) to the conveyance roller and the reversal roller by means
of CL151 (ADU paper feed) and CL152 (ADU reversal).
M151, CL151 and CL152 are driven by the DC drive board
(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB.
Related signals are PS151 (ADU no paper detection), PS152
(ADU paper feed),PS153 (ADU reversal detection) and
PS157(ADU gate).
Operation
Paper feed control
M151 goes ON after the specified time from when MC3
(2nd paper feed) goes ON. When PS152 detects the
leading edge of the paper conveyed from the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section and goes ON, CL151 goes ON,
causing the rotational force of M151 to be transmitted to the
conveyance roller. As a result, paper is fed to the stacker
from the bottom of the selector gate. CL151 goes OFF after
the specified time from when PS152 detects the trailing
edge of the paper and goes OFF.
For the second sheet of paper, CL151 goes ON again after
the specified time from when CL152 is turned OFF by the
passage of the 1st sheet. The same operation is repeated
for the subsequent sheets as well.
2-116
MAIN BODY
M151 goes OFF 80 ms after PS19 (optics sync) goes OFF
when the series of control operations in the ADU is completed.
Reversal control
When CL151 goes OFF, CL152 goes ON after the specified
time, and the rotational force of M151 is transmitted to the
reversal roller. As a result, the paper in the ADU paper feed
section is reversed and conveyed, then exited from the top
of the selector gate to the conveyance section. CL152 is
turned OFF after the specified time from when PS153 goes
OFF as a result of detecting the trailing edge of the paper.
Signals
Input signals
PS151 (PS151>DCDB>CB)
This is the no paper in stacker detection signal
[H]: Paper in stacker
[L]: No paper in stacker
PS152 (PS152> DCDB>CB)

This is the paper at entrance of ADU paper feed/
conveyance section detection signal.
This is the paper at entrance of ADU paper feed
section detection signal.
This is the paper jam at border section (paper exit side)
of main body and ADU detection signal.
[H]: Paper in stacker
[L]: No paper in stacker
M151 LD (PS153>DCDB>CB)
This signal becomes [L] when M151 reaches the
specified speed.
Output signals
M151 CONT (CB>DCDB)

[H]: M151 OFF
[L]: M151 ON
M151 CLOCK (CB>DCDB>M151)

2-117
CL151 CONT (CB>DCDB)

[H]: CL151 OFF
[L]: CL151 ON
[H]: CL152 OFF
[L]: CL152 ON
M151 DRIVE (DCDB>M151)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for M151.
[H]: M151 OFF
[L]: M151 ON
CL151 DRIVE (DCDB>CL151)
[H]: CL151 OFF
[L]: CL151 ON
[H]: CL152 OFF
[L]: CL152 ON
Conveyance Control
Output signals

This is the CL153 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: CL153 ON
[L]: CL153 ON

This is the CL153 ON/OFF drive signal.
[H]: CL153 OFF
[L]: CL153 ON
Conveyance takes place as a result of the transmission of

rotational force from M151 (ADU paper feed) by means of the
CL153 (ADU timing).
M151 and CL153 are driven by the DC driver board (DCDB)
which is controlled by the CB.
Related signals are PS154 (ADU paper exit 1), PS155 (ADU
paper exit 2) and PS156 (ADU paper exit 3).
Operation
CL153 goes ON as soon as PS19 goes ON, and conveys
the reversed and conveyed paper from the stacker to the
main body paper feed unit. CL153 goes OFF as soon as
PS18 (no feed) goes OFF.
Signals
Input signals
This is the jammed paper at entrance of ADU
conveyance section detection signal.
This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.
PS155 (PS155> DCDB>CB)

This is the jammed paper inside ADU conveyance
This is the jammed paper at exit of ADU conveyance
2-118
MAIN BODY
ADU Mis-centering Detection Control
The mis-centering detection board (IPDB) detects the rear

edge of the paper fed from the ADU, and outputs the paper
passage position via the CB to the image processing board
(IPB). During a write operation, the IPB performs mis-centering
adjustment of the paper based on this position data.
Operation
LED1 consists of a horizontal row of LEDs which light when
a paper from the ADU turns PS19 (optics synchronizing)
ON. (Invisible light because of infrared LED.) IPDB is
installed opposite LED1. The paper passage position is
detected by counting the number of LEDs 1 being blocked
off by the passage of the paper.
Signals
Input signal
SO 0 to 6 (IPDB>CB)
This is the paper passage position detection signal.
Output signals
DEI 0 to 2 (CB>IPDB)
This is the data send request signal.
LED1 DRIVE (CB>IPDB)

[L]: Lit
[H]: Out
2-119
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1] Composition
Conveyance unit
Conveyance belt
Conveyance guide plate

Corona unit release lever
Mechanisms
Fusing unit
Mechanism
*1 Paper conveyance
Drum unit
Method
One conveyance belt
*1: Paper conveyance

The paper fed from the 2nd paper feed section is conveyed
to the fusing unit by the conveyance belt. The conveyance
belt is driven by the main motor. When paper is being
conveyed, it is sucked onto the conveyance belt by the
conveyance suction motor (FM14) installed beneath the
conveyance unit, in order to improve the conveyance
performance.
Conveyance belt
Conveyance roller
2-120
MAIN BODY
Replacing the Conveyance Belt
Removing and Reinstalling the Conveyance Unit
Caution: When removing the conveyance belt, take care not

to damage it on the edge of the conveyance unit.
Procedure
(1) Remove the conveyance unit.
(2) Remove the e-ring, then remove the shaft bearing
(front).
(3) Pull out the conveyance drive shaft from the conveyance unit, then remove the conveyance belt.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit and the
fixing unit. (For the method of removing the drum unit,
refer to the sub-sections concerning the drum unit and
the fixing unit.)
(2) Detach the hook from the left side of the conveyance
guide plate, then remove the guide plate while tilting it
as shown in the figure below.
Conveyance drive shaft
Conveyance roller
Shaft bearing (front)
Hook
E-ring
Conveyance belt
Conveyance guide plate
(4) Reinstall the conveyance unit in the opposite sequence to removal.
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the conveyance unit.
Conveyance unit
Screw
(4) Install the conveyance unit in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-121
Replacing the Conveyance Suction Motor (FM14)

Caution:
FM14 (Conveyance Suction) Control
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then remove the upper/lower tray
and the paper feed unit.
(2) Open the CB toward you, then grasp the latch of the
connector (CN15) with radio pliers, and push it toward
the front of the main body.
Connector latch
FM14 (conveyance suction) is controlled by the CB via the DC

Operation
FM14 is a 24 V drive DC motor. It goes ON and OFF in
synchronism with M4 (main).
Connector (CN15)
Signals
Input signal
FM14 LD (FM14>DCDB>CB)
This signal becomes [L] when FM14 reaches the
specified speed.
Output signals
FM14 CONT (CB>DCDB)

This is the FM14 ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: FM14 ON
[H]: FM14 OFF
FM14 DRIVE (DCDB>FM14)

This is the FM14 drive control signal.
[L]: FM14 OFF
[H]: FM14 ON
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the conveyance suction motor.
Conveyance suction
motor (FM14)
Screws
(4) Reinstall the suction motor in the opposite sequence

to removal.
2-122
MAIN BODY
FUSING UNIT
Composition
Oil pad
Oil application roller
Cleaning pad
Fusing cleaning roller

Upper fusing claw
Upper fusing
roller
Paper exit
roller (upper)
Upper fusing cover

Fusing heater
lamp (upper)
Paper exit roller

(lower)
Lower fusing claw
Pressure release lever
Lower fusing roller

Fusing heater
lamp (lower)
*2: Lower roller pressing and release
Mechanisms
When you move the pressure release lever in the fusing or

release direction, the pressure cam pushes the pressure
spring up or down, causing the lower roller to be pressurized or released.
Mechanism
Fusing
*1 Heat source
Method
Pressure + heat roller
Heater lamp (one upper and one lower
lamp)
Cleaning
Fusing cleaning roller (silicone oil)
Upper roller
Aluminum + PFA coating
Lower roller
Silicone rubber + PFA tube
Separation
Separation claws (6 upper and 3 lower
claws)
Temperature
Contact type thermistor (uses a control
detection
and spare sensor)
Overheating
Non-contact type thermostat
prevention
1 each for upper and lower
Neutralizing
Neutralizing brush
*2
Pressure release Pressure release cam, spring
*1: Fusing heater lamps
Pressure cam
The fusing heater lamps consists of two halogen lamps

(one for the upper fusing roller and one for the lower fusing
roller). They are intended to reduce the warmup time from
when the machine is switched ON.
Pressure spring
Lower fusing roller
2-123
Procedure
(1) Remove the fusing unit.
(2) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp terminal
cover.
Removing and Reinstalling the Fusing Unit

Caution:
Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged

Do not touch the fusing unit immediately after

turning OFF the main switch because it is very hot
and you may receive a burn. Wait until the fusing
unit has cooled down sufficiently before working
on it.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then move the pressure release
lever to the release side.
(2) Grasp the pressure release lever, then pull it output
until it locks.
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lock piece.
(4) Pull out the fusing unit further, and remove it.
Screw
Lamp terminal screw
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp terminal.

(4) Pull out the fusing heater lamp (upper) from the upper
fusing roller.
Fusing heater lamp (upper)

Lock piece
Screw
(5) Reinstall the fusing unit in the opposite sequence to

removal.
Lamp terminal
Screw
Replacing the Fusing Heater Lamp (Upper)

Caution:
Do not touch the fusing heater lamp (upper)

with the bare hands.
(5) Reinstall the fusing lamp (upper) in the opposite sequence to removal.
Caution:
Install the fusing heater lamp with the makers mark

facing the drive gear side.
When installing the fusing heater lamp, ensure that the

ends of the lamp are facing the correct direction.
After replacing the fusing heater lamp, check to ensure

that the ends of the lamp are properly inserted in the
terminals.
2-124
MAIN BODY
Replacing the Fusing Heater Lamp (Lower)

Caution:
Do not touch the fusing heater lamp (lower)

with bare hands.
Caution: When disconnecting the faston of the fusing heater
lamp, be sure to use pliers and take care not to
apply an unreasonable force.
Procedure
(1) Remove the fusing unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the screw, and then remove the lamp terminal
cover.
Caution: A lock pin is inserted in the pressure release lever,

so take care not lose it.
(5) Disconnect the faston from the fusing heater lamp
(lower).
(6) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp holder.
(7) Pull out the fusing heater lamp (lower) from the lower
fusing roller.
Lamp holder
Fusing heater
lamp (lower)
Screw
Faston
(8) Reinstall the fusing heater lamp (lower) in the opposite

Faston
(3) Disconnect the faston from the fusing heater lamp

(lower).
(4) Loosen the screw, then remove the e-ring, and remove
the pressure release lever.
Screw
Lamp terminal cover

Screw
(loosen)
Screw
Lock pin
E-ring
2-125
Replacing the Oil Pad

Procedure
(1) Remove the fusing unit.
(2) Remove the e-ring, then remove the upper paper exit
roller unit.
(3) Remove the four screws, then remove the upper
fusing cover.
Screw
Upper paper exit

roller unit
Screw
Replacing the Fusing Cleaning Roller and Oil

Application Roller
Caution: When reinstalling the fusing cleaning roller and oil
application roller, tighten the hex screws more than
normal.
Procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing cover
and oil pad.
(2) Remove the two hex screws, then pull out the shaft to the
outside, and remove the fusing impregnated roller.
(3) Loosen the four bearing casing screws ( two for front and
back side) to remove the two hex screws. Then pull the shaft
to the outside, and remove the fusing cleaning roller.
Bearing casing
(back side)
Hex screws
Oil application
roller
Screws
Upper fusing cover
E-ring
Hex screws
(4) Open the oil pad to the upper side, then slide it left and
right, and remove it.
Fusing cleaning roller
Bearing casing
(front side)
(4) Reinstall the rollers in the opposite sequence to

removal.
When reinstalling, be careful of the following items.
The shaft must be inserted into the fusing cleaning
roller until the shaft collar reaches the roller core;
then tighten the hex screw.
Oil pad
Correct
Incorrect
Secure the bearing casing screw after confirming

that the bearing casing reaches the flat metal edge
on the fusing roller side.
The cleaning roller shaft holder must be positioned
so that the hex screws are located at the upper limit
of the sloted holes in the shaft holder.
Push the cleaning roller shaft holders in
the direction of the arrows
(5) Reinstall the oil pad in the opposite sequence to

removal.
Front
Revised 12/97
2-126
Rear
MAIN BODY
Removing and Reinstalling the Upper Fusing

Roller
(5) Remove the two heat insulation sleeves from the

upper fusing roller.
Caution: When replacing the heat insulation sleeves, coat

the inside of the sleeves with lubricant, then fit the
sleeves onto the roller shaft.
Procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller, upper fusing
cover, oil pad, fusing heater lamp (upper), fusing
cleaning roller, and oil application roller.
(2) Remove the lamp terminal cover at the rear, then
remove the c-ring, collar and gear from the upper
fusing roller.
Upper fusing roller
Heat insulation sleeve
Collar
Heat insulation sleeve
C-ring
(6) Reinstall the upper fusing roller in the opposite sequence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Lower Fusing

Roller
Gear
Procedure
(1) Remove the fusing heater lamp (upper), fusing heater
lamp (lower) and upper fusing roller.
(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the fusing
entrance cover.
Lamp terminal cover
(3) Remove the two screws at the front, then remove the
two bearing holders.
(4) Remove the bearing, then pull out the upper fusing
roller from the front.
Fusing entrance cover
Upper fusing roller
Bearing
Bearing holder
Screws
Bearing holder screw

Screw
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the entrance

guide plate (upper).
(4) Remove the two screws, then remove the entrance
guide plate (lower).
Screw
2-127
Note:
When installing the lower fusing roller, lower the

entrance guide plate (upper) to the bottom and
secure it. Lower the entrance guide plate (lower) to
the bottom and ensure that it is touching the fusing
bottom plate, then secure it.
Bearing
Bearing
Entrance guide plate (upper)

Screws
Lower fusing roller
Screws
(8) Reinstall the lower fusing roller in the opposite sequence to removal.
Entrance guide plate (lower)
Fusing lower plate
Removing and Reinstalling the Lower Fusing

Claws
Procedure
(1) Remove
(2) Remove
claws.
(3) Remove
plate.
(4) Remove
(5) Remove the two screws, then remove the paper exit
plate.
Screws
the paper exit plate.

the three springs supporting the lower fusing
the two screws, then remove the claw guide
the three lower fusing claws.
Springs
Paper exit plate
Paper exit plate
Screw
Lower fusing claws
(6) Raise the lower fusing roller, then remove it from the
paper exit side.
(7) Remove the two bearings from the lower fusing roller.
Claw guide plate

Screw
(5) Reinstall the lower fusing claws in the opposite sequence to removal.
2-128
MAIN BODY
Removing and Reinstalling the Upper Fusing

Claws
Procedure
(1) Open the upper paper exit roller unit.
(2) Remove the six springs attached to the upper fusing
claws.
(3) Pull out the two shafts, each of which has three upper
claws secured to it, to the outside, and remove the six
upper fusing claws.
Wiring band
Wiring band
Connector (CN98)
Upper paper exit
roller unit
Shaft
Springs
Screw
Screw
Springs
Shaft
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 1
Pin 2
(4) Remove the two screws, then remove fusing temperature sensor 1.
(5) Remove the screw, then remove fusing temperature
sensor 2.
Upper fusing claws
Screw
Upper fusing claws

Connector
(CN98)
Screws
(4) Reinstall the upper fusing claws in the opposite sequence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling Fusing Temperature

Sensors 1 and 2
Caution:
After reinstalling fusing temperature sensors 1

and 2, check to ensure that the sensor wires are
not touching the upper fusing roller.
After reinstalling fusing temperature sensor 2,

check to ensure that the sensor is touching the
Be sure to coat the screws of the sensors with

screw lock agent after reinstalling the sensors.
Removal procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing
cover, oil pad, oil application roller and entrance guide
plate (lower).
(2) Remove the two screws, then release the connector
(CN98).
(3) Cut the two wiring bands, then remove pins 1 to 4 of
CN98 with tweezers.
Fusing temperature
sensor 2
Fusing temperature sensor 1
2-129
Installation procedure
(1) Secure fusing temperature sensor 2 with the screw,
then place the sensor element in contact with the
(2) Set the fusing temperature sensor positioning jig between fusing temperature sensor 1 and the upper
fusing roller, then secure fusing temperature sensor 1
with two screws so that the clearance between the
sensor and the upper fusing roller is within the standard
value.
Screws
Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat (Upper)

Caution:
After reinstalling the thermostat (upper), check to

ensure that the wiring is not touching the upper
fusing roller.
Be sure to coat the screw of the thermostat (upper)

with screw lock agent after reinstalling the
thermostat.
Removal procedure
cover, oil pad and fusing impregnated roller.
(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (upper).
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the thermostat (upper).
Fastons
Screw

Fusing temperature sensor
positioning jig
(a)
Set the distance a between the upper fusing

roller and fusing temperature sensor 1 so that it
is equal to the thickness of the fusing temperature
sensor positioning jig.
Thermostat (upper)
(1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the upper fusing
roller) between the thermostat (upper) and the upper
fusing roller, then secure the thermostat (upper) with
the screw so that the clearance between the thermostat
(upper) and the upper fusing unit is the standard value.
a
Upper fusing roller
Standard: a =0.750.1mm (when pressure is applied)
(3) Coat the screw of each sensor with screw lock agent.
(4) Insert the connector pins on the end of the cable of
each sensor to a position that corresponds to CN98.
(5) Reinstall the other parts in the opposite sequence to
removal.
2-130
MAIN BODY
(2) Coat the screw of the installed thermostat (upper) with
screw lock agent.
(3) Connect the two fastons.
(4) Install the other parts in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Screw
Thermostat positioning
jig (for upper roller)
Thermostat (upper)
Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat

(Lower)
Upper fusing roller
(a)
Set the distance a between the upper fusing

roller and the thermostat (upper) so that it is
equal to the thickness of thermostat positioning
jig A .
Caution:
After installing the thermostat (lower), ensure that

the wiring is not touching the lower fusing roller.
Be sure to coat the screw of the installed thermostat

(lower) with screw lock agent.
Removal procedure
cover and paper exit plate.
(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (lower).
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lower thermostat
(lower).
Thermostat (lower)
Thermostat
(upper)
Screw
a
Upper fusing roller
Faston (rear)
Standard: a = 3.75 0.25mm (when pressure is applied)
(b)
When adjusting the above clearance, take care

that the thermostat does not ride up jig B .
A
B
2-131
(b) When adjusting the above clearance, take care

that the thermostat (lower) does not ride up jig
B.
(1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the lower fusing
roller) between the thermostat (lower) and the lower
fusing roller, then secure the thermostat (lower) with
the screw so that the clearance between the thermostat
(lower) and the lower fusing unit is the standard value.
Jig B
Jig A
Thermostat positioning jig

(for lower roller)
(2) Coat the screw of the installed thermostat (lower) with

screw lock agent.
(3) Connect the two fastons.
(4) Reinstall the other parts in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Screw
(a) Set the distance b between the lower fusing

roller and the thermostat (lower) so that it is equal
to the thickness of thermostat positioning
jig A .
Lower fusing roller
Thermostat (lower)
Standard: b = 1.75 0.2mm (when pressure is applied)
2-132
MAIN BODY
Fusing Temperature Control

MS4
Protection against abnormality

The upper thermostat (TS1) is used to protect the machine
if the temperature of the upper fusing roller rises abnormally,
and the lower thermostat (TS2) is used to protect the
machine if the temperature of the lower fusing roller rises
abnormally.
The operating temperature of each thermostat is shown
below.
TS1: Approx. 180C
TS2: Approx. 110C
MS4 (fusing set MS4)
The fusing heater remains energized even if the main door
is opened, however if the fusing pressure lever is moved to
the release side MS4 goes OFF and the flow of current to
the fusing heater is cut OFF.
Signals
S. GND
PS24 L
5VDC
6-A9
6-B8
6-B9
Input signals
TH1 ANG 1, 2 (TH1>CB)

This is the TH1 output signal.
This signal outputs a voltage that is proportional to the
surface temperature at the center of the upper fusing
roller. This signal is used for temperature control and
also for detecting an abnormally high temperature or
other abnormality.
TH2 ANG 1, 2 (TH->CB)

This is the TH2 output signal.
This signal outputs a voltage proportional to the surface temperature at the end of the upper fusing roller.
It is not directly related to temperature control but is
used for detecting an abnormality.
PS24 (PS24>CB)
This is the fuser detect PS signal.
[H]: Lever is up (non-operating position)
[L]: Lever is down (operating position)
Output signals
L2 CONT (CB>DCPS2)
This signal controls the ON/OFF state of L2.
[L]: L2 ON
[H]: L2 OFF
L4 CONT (CB>DCPS2)
This signal controls the ON/OFF state of L4.
[L]: L4 ON
[H]: L4 OFF
L2 DRIVE (DCPS2>L2)
This is the L2 AC(N) supply line.
The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L2
CONT.
L4 DRIVE (DCPS2>L4)
This is the L4 AC(N) supply line.
The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L4
CONT.
RL1 DRIVE (CB>DCPS2>RL1)

This signal controls RL1.
This signal becomes [H] if an abnormality occurs in the
machine, causing RL1 to go OFF.
PS24
CB
The upper fusing roller is heated by fusing heater lamp 1 (L2),

and the lower fusing roller by fusing heater lamp 3 (L4). The
CB detects the temperature of the upper fusing roller by means
of the middle fusing temperature sensor (TH1), and controls L2
and L4 via DCPS2.
Operation
Temperature control
Warmup
The CB turns ON the fusing heater lamp circuit in DC
power supply unit 2 (DCPS2) as soon as the main
switch is turned ON, causing L2 and L4 to go ON until
the upper fusing roller reaches the specified
temperature. Upon completion of warmup, L4 goes
ON and OFF in synchronism with L2. If the upper
fusing roller does not reach the specified temperature
within a certain time from the start of warmup, L2, L4,
and M1 (main) remain ON until the completion of
warmup.
Set temperature = 200C; warmup time = approx. 7 min.;
room temperature = 20C
Lamp
L2
L4
Warming up
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
In copying
ON/OFF
ON
MODE
2-133
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL

Parts Through Which Current Flows
When the Main Switch is Turned OFF
Parts That Operate When the Main

Switch is Turned ON
AC (C)
Operation
Current flows through the following parts if the power cord
is plugged into the power outlet, regardless of whether or
not SW1 (main) is ON or OFF.
Circuit breaker (CBR)
If an internal part short circuits, causing a current of more
than 8 A to flow, the breaker goes OFF, cutting off the
power to the machine.
Noise filter (NF)
The noise filter is used to reduce noise entering the machine via the power line, and also external leakage of noise
generated in the machine.
Internal heaters 1, 2 and 3 (HTR1, 2, 3)
These heaters are used to remove humidity from the paper
feed tray and the inside of the LCT.
Weekly timer (optional)) (W.T.)
This timer uses various time control functions to switch the
machine ON and OFF.
Operation
Power supply
When SW1 (main) is turned ON, AC power is supplied to
DC power units 1, 2 and 3 (DCPS1, 2 and 3). As a result,
DCPS1 supplies DC power to the CB, DC driver board
(DCDB) and A/D converter board (ADB). The CB starts
controlling the internal circuits and also starts the following
operations.
Initial operation of operation board (OB)
Warmup of the fusing rollers
Low speed operation of the various fans
DCPS2 supplies 24VDC to RL1, FS-102, and DF-306. RL1
turns ON after a certain period by a signal from the CB, then
supplies AC power to the AC-driven parts.
2-134
MAIN BODY
DC output voltages and corresponding symbols
Cooling Fan Control
Signals
Output signal
RL1 DRIVE (CB>DCPS2)

This is the signal which controls RL1.
If an abnormality occurs in the main body, this signal
becomes [H], causing RL1 to go OFF.
FM11 (polygon cooling fan), FM22 (E-RDH cooling fan), FM16

(main body cooling fan) and FM2 (optics cooling fan) are
driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is controlled by
the CB.
Operation
A 24 V DC motor is used for each cooling fan.
Operation of FM11
During idling: low speed rotation
During a copy operation: High speed rotation
Operation of FM22
Operation of FM16
Operation of FM2
ON only during a copy operation.
Signals
Output signals
FM2 CONT (CB>DCDB)

This is the ON/OFF control signal for FM2.
[L]: FM2 ON
[H]: FM2 OFF
2-135
FM11 CONT (CB>DCDB)

This is the rotational speed control signal for FM11.
[L]: Low speed rotation
[H]: High speed rotation
FM22 CONT (CB>DCDB)
This is the FM22 rotational speed control signal.
FM16 CONT (CB>DCDB)
This is the rotational speed control signal for FM16.
FM11 H/L (DCDB>FM11)
This is the rotation drive signal for FM11.
[L]: High speed drive
[H]: Low speed drive
FM2 DRIVE (DCDB>FM2)
This is the drive control signal for FM2.
[L]: FM2 OFF
[H]: FM2 ON
Input signal
This signal becomes [L] when FM11 reaches the set
speed.
speed.
speed.
speed.
2-136
MAIN BODY
Operation Panel Control
The operation panel consists of three operation boards which

comprise the following three circuits.
LED drive circuit
LCD display circuit
Input circuit for the various buttons
LCD display operation

The LCD (VFD1, VFD2) on operation board 2 (OB2)
displays various messages according to the LCD control
signal (serial data) output from the CB.
Various kind input operations
A matrix circuit is used for processing key inputs from the
operation panel. In this circuit, there are 12 key return
terminals for four timing pulses output from the CB, and a
total of 48 key inputs are output to the CB.
Operation
LED drive operation
The various LEDs are turned ON and OFF by ICs (shift
register/latch driver).
Each IC turns ON/OFF the LED connected each output
terminal, according to serial data from the control board
(CB).
2-137
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
SEL 0
SEL 1
SEL 2
SEL 3
KEY
SW001
SW015
SW016
SW017
RTN O
KEY
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW008
RTN 1
KEY
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW012
RTN 2
Stop/Clear
KEY
SW013,014
SW002
SW003
SW004
RTN 3
Copy
Interrupt
Auto Reset
Super Size
KEY
SW004
SW007
SW002
SW003
RTN 4
Enlarge
Magnification
Copy Density
Copy Density
KEY
SW005
SW015
SW007
SW021
RTN 5
Reduce
Spare
Reduction Shift/Shift
Output
KEY
SW013
SW013
SW015
SW006
RTN 6
2 IN 1/4 IN 1
Text/Photo
Book Copy
erasure outside original area
KEY
SW001
SW018
SW004
SW003
RTN 7
Copy Mode
Preheat
Thick Paper/Thin Paper
Memory
KEY
SW009
SW008
SW010
SW011
RTN C
F2
Set F1
F3
F4
KEY
SW014
SW006
SW013
SW012
RTN D
Image Read
Independent Magnification Change
Single Step
Insertion Page/Chapter Demarcation
KEY
SW012
SW009
SW010
SW005
RTN E
Memory
Repeat
KEY
SW014
RTN F
Timer Setting
SW011
Intersheet
: OB1,
: OB2,
Reversed black and white mode Fold erasure/frame erasure

SW008
OHP intersheet
SW001
Timer Cancel
: OB3,
Initial operation of the operation panel

When the machine is in one of the following states, the
various set conditions are in the initial conditions.
When the power is switched ON (SW1 OFF>ON)
When the auto reset operates
When the auto shutoff is canceled
When the auto button is pressed
When the key counter of a machine that uses a key

counter is inserted
When originals are placed in the ADF in the non-ADF

mode
When the bypass feed tray is returned in the bypass

feed mode
Indication and state after the initial operation

Function
Start print button
Copy quantity
ADF
AES
APS
1:1
Magnification
Paper size
Initial state
Lit green (ready state)
01
Flashing (auto priority mode) *
Lit (auto priority mode) *
Lit (auto priority mode) *
Lit
Fixed
The LEDs corresponding to all of
the set paper sizes are lit.
Caution: Items marked * can be selected in the 25 mode.
2-138
MAIN BODY
Signals
Input signals
KEY RTN 0 to F (OB1>CB)
This is the signal returned from the button signal input
section.
Output signals
KEY SEL 0 to 3 (CB>OB1)

These are the timing pulses to the button signal input
section.
OB DATA (CB>OB1)
This is the LED display data.
OB CLOCK (CB>OB1)
This is the clock signal used to read OB DATA. Data
is read in synchronism with this signal.
OB LATCH (CB>OB1)
This is the data latch signal. When this signal becomes
[L], the read data is displayed on the LED.
LCD1 SIG (CB>OB2)

This is the VFD1 ON/OFF control signal.
When this signal is [L], VFD1 is ON.
LCD1 DATA (CB>OB2)

This is the VFD1 display data.
LCD1 CLOCK (CB>OB2)

This is the clock signal for reading LCD1 DATA. Data
is read in synchronism with this signal.
LCD1 LATCH (CB>OB2)

This is the data latch signal. When this signal is [L], the
read data is displayed on VFD1.
LCD2 SIG (CB>OB2)

This is the VFD2 ON/OFF control signal.
When this signal is [L], VVFD1 is ON.
LCD2 DATA (CB>OB2)

This is the VFD2 display data.
LCD2 CLOCK (CB>OB2)

This is the clock signal for reading LCD2 DATA.
Data is read in synchronism with this signal.
LCD2 LATCH (CB>OB2)

This is the data latch signal. When this signal becomes
[L], the read data is displayed on VFD2.
Counter Control
This machine contains the following counters.

Total counter (C(T))
Key counter (C(K))
These counters are controlled by the CB.
PS25 (paper exit detection) is a signal related to this
control.
Operation
This machine counts copies by means of two software
counters.
Paper feed counter

The count increases by 1 each time the 1st paper feed
goes ON.
Paper exit counter

The count increases by 1 each time PS25 goes ON
OFF.
Operation of each counter
Copy quantity display counter on OB
Normal
Indicates the count on the
paper feed counter.
Paper jam
ndicates the count on
I the paper exit counter.
C(K)
This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit
counter.
C(T)
This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit
counter.
2-139
Signals
Option Control
Input signals
C(K) JOINT (C(K)>CB)

This signal informs the CB that the count on C(K) has
increased.
PS25 (PS25>CB)
This is the PS25 state signal.
When this signal is [L], PS25 goes ON, indicating that
the paper has been exited.
Output signals
C(T) DRIVE (CB>C(T))

This is the C(T) drive signal.
When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of
C(T) increases by 1.
C(K) DRIVE (CB>C(K))

This is the C(K) drive signal.
When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of
C(K) increases by 1.
(FS-103)
In this machine, the weekly timer and memory card options are
controlled by the CB.
Operation
The weekly timer, memory card, and FNS contain a CPU
which controls the flow of data with the main body CB.
(Refer to the option manual for details of each option.)
Power is supplied to the FNS by DCPS2 (DC power supply
unit). The weeklt timer has its own power supply and power
is supplied to the memory card via the CB.
2-140
MAIN BODY
Operation/output timing of coin vender signal
Pin No.
1
Signal name
Vender copy
Description
Copy in progress
Kind of signal
Output timing
Output from when the copy button is pressed Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
Vender copy
signal
Paper feed signal
until the copy is exited.

100 ms L signal that is synchronized with the Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
Paper size
Paper size signal
main body tray/LCD

Output only while a copy is being made.
4
5
0 to 3
Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
6
7
Vender two-
Two-sided copy
Signal output only while a copy is being Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
select signal
Spare terminal
made.
sided copy
N.C.
9
10
N.C.
P.GND
Spare terminal
Power ground
2-141
2-142
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
4-1
4-2
JAM LIST
JAM LIST
This section contains paper jam operating conditions.
Paper Jam
Classifica- Jam
tion
code
Main body
J10-2 When
operating
paper feed
jam
J10-4
J11-1 When
stationary
J11-2 When
operating
J11-3
J11-4
J12-1 When
stationary
J12-2 When
operating
Main body and LCT
J12-3
J12-4
LCT
paper feed
jam
J13-1 When
stationary
J13-2 When
operating
J13-3
J14-1 When
stationary
J14-2 When
operating
J14-3
Causes
PS14 (register) is not turned ON
within 2 seconds from ON of SD3
(bypass feed).
PS30 (bypass) is ON at the time of
ON of SD3 (bypass feed).
PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON during idling.
PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is not turned
ON within 400 msec from ON of an
SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)).
PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON
within 650 msec from ON of an SD1
(1st paper feed (upper)).
PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON for
ON of SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)).
PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON during idling.
PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is not turned
ON within 400 msec from ON of SD2
(1st paper feed (lower)).
within 820 msec from ON of SD2
(1st paper feed (lower)).
PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON for
ON of SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)).
PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) is ON
during idling.
PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) not
turned ON within 420 msec from ON
of SD141 (LCT paper feed (1000)).
PS144 (LCT conveyance (1000)) is
not turned ON within 2 seconds from
ON of SD141 (LCT paper feed
(1000)).
PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is ON
during idling.
PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is not
of SD140 (LCT paper feed (1500)).
PS146 (LCT conveyance (1500)) is
not turned ON within 2.4 seconds
from ON of SD140 (LCT paper feed
(1500)).
5-1
Operation when jam

occurs
A copy is made, a jam
occurs, and the copier
stops after the copy
exits.
Method of clearing jam

Remove the original paper from bypass tray then
remove the jammed paper.
Open the main body conveyance door and remove
the jammed paper, then
close it.
Open the tray and remove
close it.
Open the LCT conveyance

door and remove the
jammed paper, if any, and
close it.
Open the tray and remove
the jammed paper, if any,
and close it.
Classification
Conveyance
jam
Jam
code
J16 When
stationary
When
operating
J17-1 When
stationary
J17-2 When
operating
J17-3
J17-4
Main body and LCT
J17-5
J17-6
J19
When
stationary
When
operating
J21
J30-1
J30-2
J31
J32
Revised 3/99
When
stationary
When
operating
Causes
PS14 (register) is ON during idling.
PS14 (register) is not turned OFF
within 1300 msec from completion
of exposure.
PS18 (no feed) or PS19 (optics sync)
is ON during idling.
PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON
within 280 msec from start of copying.
PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON
within 560 msec from ON of PS157
(ADU gate).
PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON
within 430 msec from the start of
reconveyance in right lengthwise
transport in LCT paper feed.
within 390 msec from the start of
reconveyance in right lengthwise
transport in LCT/ADU reverse side.
A loop is not completed within 400
msec from ON of a PS18 (no feed).
PS146 (LCT pass detection) or
PS144 (LCT feed) is ON during idling.
PS146 (LCT pass detection) has
not turned ON within 300ms after
the 1st feeder of LCT1 was ON.
PS144 (LCT feed) has not turned
ON within 440ms after 1st feeder of
LCT2 was ON.
Drum jam sensor is ON.
PS14 (register) is not turned OFF
within paper size length + 20 mm
from ON of MC3 (2nd paper feed).
PS14 (register) is not ON when MC3
(2nd paper feed) is ON.
PS25 (paper exit) is not turned ON
within 2000 msec from ON of MC3
(2nd paper feed).
PS25 (paper exit) was turned ON
within 280 msec from copy start.
PS25 (paper exit) is ON during idling.
PS25 (paper exit) is not turned OFF/
ON within 2000 msec from completion of exposure.
5-2
Operation when jam

occurs
The main body is
stopped immediately.

Open the front door and
remove the jammed paper, then close it.
A copy is made, a jam

occurs, and the copier
stops after the copy
exits.
Open the conveyance

door and remove the
jammed paper, then close
it.
The main body is

Open the front door and

remove the jammed
paper, then close it.
Open the paper exit and

the front door and remove
close them.
JAM LIST
Jam
code
J61 When
operating
J62 When
stationary
When
operating
ADF
Classification
ADF
paper exit
jam
When
stationary
When
operating
J72
When
stationary
When
operating
FS-102
FNS
conveyance
jam
J63
FS-103
FNS
J74
paper exit
jam
FNS
J75
stapler jam
FS-103
J72-01 When
stationary
J72-02
J72-03
J72-04
J72-05
J72-06
Causes
ADF was opened during ADF
operation.
PS304 (original passage) is ON during idling in ADF mode.
PS304 (original passage) is not
turned ON within a certain period
from the start of ADF original.
PS304 (original passage) is not
turned OFF within a certain period
from its ON.
PS304 (original passage) ON when
original setting is completed.
PS305 (original exit) is ON during
idling in ADF mode.
PS305 (original exit) is not turned
ON within a certain period from the
start of ADF original exit.
OFF within a certain period from its
ON.
ON within a certain period from the
start of RADF original reversing.
PS805 (paper pass 1) or PS806
(paper pass 2) are ON during idling.
During operation, the front cover
was opened or a finisher was separated from the main body.
PS805 (paper pass 1) or PS806
(paper pass 2) are not turned ON
within a certain period from ON of
PS25 (paper exit).
In finisher, paper conveyance was
not carried out properly.
Papers having different widthwise
sizes were delivered on a staple
tray.
Stapler did not operate correctly.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
detected paper.
PS5 (stacker conveyance passage)
detected paper.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) and
detected paper.
PS6 (paper exit 1) detected paper.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) and
and PS6 (paper exit 1) detected
paper.
5-3
Operation when jam

occurs
ADF is stopped immediately.
When there is paper in
or after transfer, the
main body stops after
paper exit.
Finisher/main body is
FS-103/main body is

Open ADF and remove the
it.
If there is jammed paper
on a conveyance unit in
the main body, remove it.
If there is a jammed paper

in finisher/main body, remove it.
Open finisher and remove

jammed paper, then
close it.
Remove jammed staple
from a stapler unit.
Remove the jammed
paper from the finisher/
main body.
Revised 3/99
Classifica- Jam
tion
code
FS-103
J72-07 When
stationary
J72-08
J72-09
J72-0A
J72-0B
J72-0C
J72-0D
J72-0E
FS-103
J72-0F
J72-10
J72-11
J72-12
J72-13
J72-14
J72-15
J72-16
J72-17
Operation when jam

occurs
Causes
PS4 (FIN entrance passage), PS5
(stacker conveyance passage), and
PS1 (printer paper exit) is ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit) and PS4
(stacker conveyance passage) are
ON.
ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage), and PS4 (FIN
entrance passage) are ON.
(paper exit 1) are ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS4 (FIN
entrance passage), and PS6 (paper
exit 1) are ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS5
PS6 (paper exit 1) are ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS6 (paper
exit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage), and PS4 (FIN entrance
passage) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0) is ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0) and PS4
(FIN entrance passage) are ON.
ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS5 (stacker
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS4 (FIN
entrance passage), and PS6 (paper
exit 1) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS5
PS6 (paper exit 1) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS6 (paper
exit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage), and PS4 (FIN entrance
passage) are ON.
FS-103/main body are


Remove the jammed
main body.
Note: For several of the jam conditions listed in this section, the jam codes for FS-103A equipped machines differ from those
of FS-103 equipped machines. For example, if both finishers are experiencing the same exact jam condition, such as: PS4
(FIN entrance passing) is not turned ON after the copy is conveyed throught the main body paper exit photosensor, code
J72-41 would appear on FS-103A equipped machines however, code J72-21 would appear on FS-103 equipped
machines. This service manual provides FS-103 codes only. For this reason, a table has been included at the end of this
paper jam section which provides cross-reference information to determine the corresponding FS-103 jam codes for
FS-103A equipped machines.
Revised 3/99
5-4
JAM LIST
Classifica- Jam
tion
code
J72-18 When
FS-103
stationary
J72-19
J72-1A
J72-1B
J72-1C
J72-1D
J72-1E
FS-103
J72-1F
J72-21 When
operating
J72-22
J72-23
J72-24
J72-26
J72-27
J72-28
J72-29
Operation when jam

occurs
Causes
(printer paper exit) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit), and PS4 (FIN entrance
passage) are ON.
paper exit), and PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage) are ON.
paper exit), PS5 (stacker
paper exit) and PS6 (paper exit 1 )
are ON.
paper exit), PS4 (FIN entrance
passage), and PS6 (paper exit 1)
are ON.
paper exit), PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage), and PS6
paper exit), PS4 (FIN entrance
passage), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage), and PS6 (paper exit 1)
are ON.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) does
not turn ON after paper goes past
main body paper exit PS.
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn ON
after paper goes past PS4 (FIN
entrance passage) (only in offset
mode).
does not turn ON after paper goes
past PS4 (FIN entrance passage).
does not turn OFF within a certain
period from when it turned ON.
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn ON
within a certain period from when
M7 (paper exit roller) turned ON. (In
staple mode only.)
not turn OFF within a certain period
from when it turned ON.
After PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
turns ON, it does not turn OFF. (Subtray exiting only.)
After PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
turns ON/OFF, PS12 (paper exit)
does not turn ON/OFF.
5-5


Remove the jammed
main body.
Revised 3/99
Classifica- Jam
tion
code
FS-103
J72-31 When
operating
J72-32
J72-33
J72-41
FS-103
J72-42
J72-43
J72-44
J72-45
J72-46
J72-47
ADU
paper feed
jam
J92
When
operating
J93
When
stationary
ADU
When
operating
ADU
paper exit
jam
Revised 3/99
J94
Operation when jam

occurs
Causes
PS17 (stapler F HP) does not turn
ON within a certain period from
when M10 (stapler F) turned ON.
PS15 (stapler R HP) does not
turn ON within a certain period
from when M9 (stapler R) turned
ON.
PS15 (stapler R HP) and PS17
(stapler F HP) do not turn ON
M9 (stapler R) and M10 (stapler
F) turned ON.
not turn ON after paper goes past
main body paper exit PS
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn
ON after paper goes past PS4
(FIN entrance passage) (Only in
offset mode.)
PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage) does not turn ON after
paper goes past PS4 (FIN
entrance passage).
PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage) does not turn OFF
it turned ON.
ON within a certain period from
when M7 (paper exit roller)
turned ON.
OFF within a certain period from
when it turned ON.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
does not turn OFF within a certain
period from when it turned ON.
PS152 (ADU paper feed) is not
turned ON within 2000 msec from
ON of PS25 (paper exit).
During idling, PS152 (ADU paper
feed), PS153 (ADU reversal) or
PS157 (ADU gate) is ON.
PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON
within 280 msec from the copy start.
CL151 (ADU paper feed) is not
turned OFF within 1500 msec from
ON of PS152 (ADU paper feed).
PS154 (ADU paper exit 1) is not
turned ON within 640 msec from
OFF of PS152 (ADU paper feed).
PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) is not
of PS154 (ADU paper exit 1).
5-6

Remove the jammed

main body.
The main body is

Open ADU/main body

front door/lengthwise
conveyance door and
remove jammed paper,
then close it.
JAM LIST
Jam
code
J95 When
stationary
ADU
Classification
ADU
paper exit
jam
J96
When
operating
Causes
During idling, PS154 (ADU paper
exit 1), PS155 (ADU paper exit 2),
PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) or PS151
(ADU no paper) is ON.
Operation when jam

occurs
The main body is

Open ADU/main body
front door/lengthwise conveyance door and remove
it.
PS153 (ADU reversal) is OFF after

140 msec from OFF of PS152 (ADU
paper feed).
FS-103/FS-103A Paper Jam Code Cross-Reference Table

For FS-103A equipped machines, refer to this table to determine the corresponding FS-103 code for those FS103A codes listed below.
If this FS-103A code is displayed: The corresponding FS-103 code is:

J72-21
J72-41
J72-22
J72-42
J72-23
J72-43
J72-24
J72-44
J72-26
J72-46
J72-27
J72-47
J72-28
J72-48
J72-29
J72-49
5-7
Revised 3/99
Warning
Machine warnings appear as flashing jam codes (3 digits) on the magnification display LED..
Main body
Warning
ClassificaCauses
code
tion
Paper feed
P17 Paper feed door (upper) of the main body
door (upper)
was opened.
open
Paper feed
P19 Paper feed door (lower) of the main body
door (lower)
was opened.
open
Paper exit
P33 Paper feed door was opened.
door open
Front door
P51 Front door was opened.
open
P81 When a key counter is not mounted on a
Key counter
not mounted
machine to be equipped with the key
counter.
L detection
connector
coming off
P27
Electronic
RDH
memory
overflow
P45
ADU open
P91
Tray 3 over
loading of
transfer
papers
Tray 4 over
loading of
transfer
papers
P13
P14
Operation in case of warning
Releasing method
The main body is stopped Close paper feed door

immediately if it is in the copy (upper).
process.
Close paper feed door
(lower).
Close paper exit door.
Close front door.
When a key counter is drawn

out during book copying, paper
in copying stops at paper exit.
However, when a key counter
instant cut mode is selected,
the main body is stopped
immediately.
When L detection output does not vary Before the start of copying, a
after a certain period from the start of copy warning appears. After the start
of copying, the main body stops
operation.
after ejecting all papers, and a
warning is displayed.
Mount a key counter.

Reset to initial set state.
In the case of instant cut
mode, remove jammed
paper.
In the case of overflow of memory in a In the case of collective reading,

a warning appears and MSG
mode of using E-RDH.
functions are conducted. When
ADF is used, an original is
ejected when the machine
stops.
In the case of real time output, a
warning appears and MSG
functions are conducted after
completion of partial output.
The main body is stopped
When ADU is drawn out.
immediately if it is in process of
copying.
When tray 3 is mounted, upper limit Only in idling, "draw out tray 3
detection sensor is ON (overloading) from and remove paper are
displayed on detection MSG.
the beginning.
Change the number of

originals and read again.
When tray 4 is mounted, upper limit

detection sensor is ON (overloading) from
the beginning.
5-8
Insert connector after

turning main switch OFF,
then turn it ON.
Set ADU.
Pull out corresponding

tray, or reduce the number
of papers.
JAM LIST
Finisher
ADF
Classification
Reversal
enclosure
open
Leaving an
original
Warning
Operation in case of warning
Causes
code
P61 Reversal enclosure of RADF was opened

during idling.
P64
*1
Drawing out
of original
P68
*1
No feed
P69
Paper
remaining
on tray
P74
No staple in
stapler
P76
Stapler unit
not mounted
P78
After non-ADF copying, ADF mode was

selected without removing original by
opening/closing ADF.
Original was drawn out during book copy- The main body detects that job
set has been completed, and
ing.
ADF and the main body stop
after the copy sets are finished,
and then a warning is displayed.
Original no feed was caused in ADF mode. The main body detects no
original feed, and ADF and the
main body stop after the copies
are finished, and then a warning
is displayed.
Releasing method
Close reversal enclosure.
Remove original by
opening and closing ADF.
Set original after drawing
it once.
Recovery is not
conducted.
Set original after drawing
it once.
Conduct JOB recovery
operation. (Remaining
paper
process
is
necessary when papers
remain in the main body
during book copying.)
Remove paper from tray.
(Continue remaining
output operation with copy
ON.)
Load a new staple
cartridge.
During idling or copying, tray paper detec- After receiving from finisher the
tion or staple tray detection detected pa- signal showing excessive
sheets loading, a warning is
per.
displayed at a pause in the copy
sets.
Staples in a staple cartridge were used In staple mode, copying is
continued until the number of
up.
sheets to be stapled is reached.
Stapler unit is not mounted.
Set a stapler unit.
*1: During copy operation, when an ADF original is removed or inserted, P68 or P69 occurs, depending on timing. When this
happens the recovery method is different.
5-9
Trouble
Classification
Warning
code
Paper feed
lifting
trouble
F18-1
(upper)
F18-2
(lower)
F18-3
(10)
F18-4
(15)
Main body
Wire
cleaning
trouble
High voltage
power
source
trouble
Fusing high
temperature
trouble
Fusing low
temperature
trouble
Operation in case of
Releasing
warning
method
PS16 (upper limit (upper)) is not The main body is stopped Main switch
turned ON within 7.5 seconds from immediately if it is in copy OFF ON
process, and main relay
ON of M17 (upper try).
PS17 (upper limit (lower)) is not is turned OFF.
turned ON within 7.5 seconds from
ON of M18 (lower try).
PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000)) is
from ON of M142 (LCT try (1000)).
PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500)) is
from ON of M141 (LCT try (1500)).
Causes
F22-1 Operation for charging corona

wire cleaning was tried, but
either it was locked, or it was
locked half way.
F22-2 Operation for transfer and separation corona wire cleaning was
tried, but either it was locked,
or it was locked half way.
F28-1 When charging output is read
as an abnormal discharge.
F28-2 When transfer output is read
F28-3 When separation output is read
F34-1 Fusing temperature is exceeding approx. 220C. (Fusing high
temperature detection circuit
operates.)
F34-2 Fusing temperature is exceeding approx. 220C. (Fusing high
temperature detection circuit
operates.)
F35-1 Warmup is not completed
within a certain period from the
start of the warmup. (Fusing
low temperature trouble detection software operates.)
F35-2 After completion of warmup,
fusing temperature is lower
than a prescribed temperature.
(Fusing low temp. trouble
detection software operates.)
Main relay is turned OFF

and all keys are not
accepted.
Estimated defective parts

CB (control board)
M17 (upper try)
PS16 (upper limit (upper))
CB (control board)
M18 (lower try)
PS17 (upper limit (lower))
CB (control board)
M142 (LCT try (1000))
PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000))
CB (control board)
M141 (LCT try (1500))
PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500))
DCDB (DC driver board)
Transfer/separation unit
DCDB (DC driver board)

immediately if it is in copy
process, main relay is
turned OFF, and all keys
are not accepted.
Main switch
OFF ON
R e m o v e
jammed paper.

HV1 (high voltage unit 1)
Transfer unit
Separation unit
Main relay is turned OFF, Change a key TH1 (fusing temperature sensor 1)
and all keys are not word at address TH2 (fusing temperature sensor 2)
accepted.
of P47 to 0 in 25
mode.
TH1 (fusing temperature sensor 1)

L2 (fusing heater lamp (upper))
L4 (fusing heater lamp (lower))
Fusing unit insertion failure
5-10
Main body
JAM LIST
ClassificaWarning
Causes
tion
code
Snapping
F36-1 A prescribed temperature is not
reached within 40 seconds from
of
fusing
the start of warmup. (Fusing
sensor
sensor snapping detection software operates.)
F36-2 A prescribed temperature is not
reached within 40 seconds from
the start of warmup. (Fusing
sensor snapping detection circuit operates.)
Optics re- F41-1 Each PS in optics is not turned ON
turning trouwithin 5 seconds from the start of
ble
optics returning in initial search.
(PS3 (shading position),PS4 (paper feed restart),PS5 (optics
return),PS7 (optics timing))
F41-2 Home position sensor is not
turned ON when optics stops in
optics return.
F41-3 Optics return signal is not turned
ON within 120 msec from start
of brake when optics return.
Original glass detection is OFF.
Glass open F41-4 PS8 (glass) is OFF.
trouble
Releasing
warning
method
Main relay is turned OFF, Change a key
and all keys are not ac- word at address
cepted.
of P47 to 0 in 25
mode.

immediately, the main
relay is turned OFF, and
all keys are not accepted.
Main switch
OFF ON
R e m o v e
jammed paper.
OPMDB (optics drive motor drive board)

PS3 (shading position)
PS4 (paper feed restart)
PS5 (optics return)
PS7 (optics timing)
Exposure unit
OPMDB (optics drive motor drive board)
CB brake data
PS8 (glass)
Original glass mounting
failure
CVR trouble

immediately if it is in copy
process, the main relay is
turned OFF, and all keys
are not accepted.
Set
original
glass, and OFF
ON of main
switch .
OFF of main
switch ON
Remove
jammed paper,
if any.
F43-1 During copying, FB signal of

L1 (exposure lamp is ON or is
snapped) is ON for 20 seconds
or more.
F43-2 Software detects that FB signal
of L1 (output when exposure
lamp is ON or is snapped) is
not turned ON 1 second after
the outputting of L1 lighting signals.
F43-3 FB signal of L1 is ON for 45
seconds in a self-diagnostic
mode and for 21 seconds in all
other cases.
F43-4 FB signal of L1 (output when
exposure lamp is ON or is
snapped) is ON for 21 seconds
or more during idling.
5-11

CB (control board)
Fusing unit insertion failure
CB (control board)
DCPS2 (DC power supply unit 2)
L1 (exposure lamp)
Exposure temperature fuse
Main body
ClassificaWarning
Causes
tion
code
Image
E46-0 During APC, when LDB1 (laprocessing
ser diode board 1) or LDB2
error
(laser diode board 2) sensed
an error.
E46-1 (Not used)
.
E46-2 An error of the FIFO of the ERDH.
E46-6 An error of the extension of the
E-RDH.
E46-8 An error in the INDEXSB (index sensor board).
When no change is observed
in outputting the NDEXSB in
executing the APS.
Image
processing
CPU error
E46-9 Compression IC error.

When DTACK is not returned
from the compression IC.
E47-0 Communication is not returned
from the CPU of the IPB (image
processing board).
E47-1 Paper arrived at the 2nd paper
feed position too early.
E47-2 AD board. During shooting.

Auto gain control.
S u b - s c a n - E48 A sub-scanning beam correcning
tion error occurs when a
beam correccomplete command is not
tion error
returned within 10 seconds.
Image
F49-0 The E- RDH is not connected.
processing
connection
F49-1 ADB (AD conversion board) is
error
not connected.
F49-2 The laser driver board/1 is not
connected.
F49-3 The laser driver board/2 is not
connected.
F49-4 The index-sensing board is not
connected.
F49-5 The sub-scanning correction
board is not connected.
warning
During copying the main
body
is
stopped
immediately. The main
relay is turned OFF and
Releasing
method
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON. If there is
jamming paper,
remove it.

IPB (image processing board)
LDB1 (laser diode board 1)
Laser interlock
E-RDH (electronic RDH control board)

INDEXSB (index sensor board)
PB (image processing board)
Laser interlock
Turn the main

switch from OFF
to ON.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON. If there is
jamming paper,
remove it.
May occur only when Turn the main
AGC is carried out during switch from OFF
to ON.
idling.
During idling the process is immediately
interrupted.
During idling the process is immediately
interrupted.
During copying the
process is immediately
interrupted.
When the power supply is

charged, it is sensed. The
main relay is turned OFF
and all keys are not
accepted.

Bundle
MC8 (conveyance), IPB
(image processing board)
IPB (image processing

board, ADB (A/D board)

M40 (laser revise)
Turn the main E-RDH (electronic RDH control board)
switch from OFF
to ON. If there is ADB (AD conversion board)
jamming paper,
remove it.
INDEXSB (index sensor board)
M40 (laser revise)
5-12
JAM LIST
Warning
ClassificaCauses
code
tion
error
in
M35
Motor speed F51-1 Speed
(developing screw).
abnormality
F51-2 Speed error in M1 (main).
Releasing
warning
method
The main body is stopped Turn the main
immediately. The main switch from OFF
relay is turned OFF and to ON.
F51-7 Speed error in M151 (ADU

paper feed).
F51-8 Speed error in M140 (LCT
paper feed).
F51-9 Speed error in M12 (optics
drive).
M35 (developing screw)

DCDB (DC drive board)
M1 (main)
M10 (toner supply)
M3 (developing drive)
M4 (drum)
M5 (polygon)
PBDB (polygon drive board)
M151 (ADU paper feed)
M140 (LCT paper feed)
M12 (optics drive)
OPMDB (optical drive motor drive board)
F52-1
FM16 (main body cooling fan)
F51-3 Speed error in M10 (toner

supply).
F51-4 Speed error in M3 (developing
drive).
F51-5 Speed error in M4 (drum).
Main body
F51-6 Speed error in M5 (polygon).
Fan lock
abnormality
F52-2
F52-3
F52-4
F52-5
F52-6
F52-7
ADF
ADF
abnormality
E60
E67
During copying, after all

papers exit, the main body
stops, and all keys are not
accepted.
immediately
during
shading correction and all
keys are not accepted.
Locking error in FM16 (main After set JOBs are combody cooling fan).
pleted, the warnings are
Locking error in FM14 (conveyance displayed.
suction fan).
Locking error in FM30 (developing
suction fan).
Locking error in FM2 (optics
cooling fan).
Locking error in FM15 (E-RDH
cooling fan).
Locking error in FM11 (polygon
cooling fan).
Locking error in M152 (ADU
fan).
Communication between the The main body and the
main body CB and the ADF is ADF are stopped immediscontinued for a certain time. diately. The main relay is
turned OFF and all keys
are not accepted.
During the ADF working, a sig- The ADF is stopped imnal from PS307 (ADF encoder) mediately. With regard to
the main body, after comis not sent in a certain time.
pleting copying, the main
relay is turned OFF.
5-13
FM14 (conveyance suction fan)

FM30 (developing suction fan)
FM2 (optics cooling fan)
FM15 (E-RDH cooling fan)
FM11 (polygon cooling fan)
M152 (ADU fan)
Turn the main CB (control board)
switch from ADF CB (ADF control board)
OFF to ON. If
there is jamming paper,
remove it.
ADF CB (ADF control board)
M301 (ADF drive)
Classification
Finisher
abnormality
Warning
Causes
code
E70 Communication error
F77-1 M801 (conveyance) error
F77-2 M802 (1st exiting) error
F77-3 M803 (2nd exiting) error
FS-102
F77-4 M804 (tray elevation upward/

downward) error
F77-5 M805 (tray shift) error
F77-6 M806 (staple guide) error
F77-7 M807 (staple) error
F77-8 M808 (oscillating unit) error
FS-103
M2 (roller
shift)
abnormality
M3 (tray UP/
DOWN)
abnormality
M5 (register
plate)
abnormality
M7 (paper
exit roller)
abnormality
M8 (paper
exit)
abnormality
E77-01 <When copying>

After the roller starts
transfering, it does not reach
the shift position. (PS18 (roller
shift HP) is not turned ON.
After the roller starts returning,
PS18 (roller shift HP) is not
turned ON.
<When the power is ON/When
the door opens or closes>
After M2 starts operating, PS18
(roller shift HP) is not turned
ON.
E77-02 After M3 (tray UP/DOWN) starts
moving, PS2 (tray upper limit)
or PS7 (stapled paper exit
upper limit) is not turned ON.
E77-03 After M5 (register plate) starts
operating, PS8 (register plate
HP) is not turned OFF within a
certain period, or it is not turned
ON after it's turned OFF.
E77-04 After M7 (paper exit roller) starts
moving, PS9 (paper exit belt
HP) is not turned ON. (Only in
staple mode.)
E77-05 After M8 (paper exit) starts
moving, opening/closing
action does not stop within a
certain period. (PS12 (paper
exit) is not turned ON or OFF.)
Releasing
warning
method
The main body and the Turn the main
finisher are stopped switch from OFF
immediately. The main to ON.
relay is turned OFF,
rejecting any key input.
FNS CB (FNS control board)

Connector
M801 (conveyance)
M802 (1st exit)
M803 (2nd exit)
M804 (tray elevation upward/
downward)
M805 (tray shift)
M806(staple guide)
M807(staple)
M808 (oscillating unit)
The main body is stopped Turn the main M2 (roller shift), PS18
immediately and the main switch from OFF (roller shift HP)
relay is turned OFF, to ON. Remove
rejecting any key input. any jammed
paper.
M3 (tray UP/DOWN), PS2

(tray upper limit), PS7
(stapled paper exit upper
limit)
M5 (register plate), PS8
(register plate HP)
M7 (paper exit roller), PS9

(paper exit belt HP)
M8 (paper exit), PS12

(paper exit)
5-14
JAM LIST
Weekly timer
FS-103
Warning
code
After M11 (stapler) starts

M11 (stapler
E77-06 operating, PS11 (stapler
transfer
transferHP) is not turned OFF,
abnormality
or it is not turned ON after it's
turned OFF.
M12 (stapler E77-07 After two places are stapled
and M12 (stapler rotary)
rotary
rotates, PS21 (stapler rotary
abnormality
HP1) and PS22 (stapler rotary
HP2) are not turned ON.
(Diagonal rotation is not
properly completed.)
E77-08 After MS12 (stapler rotary)
starts moving, the stapler
vertical rotation is not properly
completed while selecting two
staple places.
E77-09 PS20 actuator is stuck and does
PS20
not return.
stacker
paper zero
sensor
abnormality
E77-11 PS17 (stapler F HP) is not
M10
truned ON after M10 started
(stapler F)
reverse rotation by detecting
abnormality
J72-31/J72-33.
M9 (stapler R) E77-12 PS15 (stapler R HP) is not
turned ON after M9 started
abnormality
reverse rotation by detecting
J72-32/J72-33.
Weekly timer E80 Communication error between
the weekly timer and the main
abnormality
body.
Power supply F83-1
abnormality
F83-2
Main body
Causes
F83-3
F83-4
warning
immediately and the main
relay is turned OFF,
rejecting any key input.
Releasing
method
Turn the main M11 (stapler), PS11

switch from OFF (stapler transfer HP)
to ON. Remove
any
jammed
paper.
M12 (stapler rotary),
PS21 (stapler rotary
HP1), PS22 (stapler
rotary HP2)
PS20 (stacker paper

zero sensor)
M10 (stapler F), PS17

(stapler F HP)
M9 (stapler R), PS15

(stapler R HP)
Stop communication, The Turn the main

main relay is turned OFF switch from OFF
and all keys are not ac- to ON.
cepted.
40V has not arrived from the When the power supply
DCDB (DC drive board).
error is detected in idling,
the main relay is turned
24V (for the main body) has not OFF and all keys are not
arrived from the DCDB (DC accepted.
drive bd.). (The door is closed.)
24V (for option use) has not arrived from the DCPS2
(DC power supply unit 2).
12V has not arrived.
F83-5 8V has not arrived.

F83-7 Processing system 5V has not
arrived.
5-15
Weekly timer

CB (control board)
CB (control board)
CB (control board)
CB (control board)
CB (control board)
CB (control board)
LIST OF CONNECTOR DISCONNECTIONS

When an error occurs, there is a possibility that the following connectors are disconnected. If the connector is connected conduct
the troubleshooting outlined in the jam list.
Paper Jams
Code
Identification numbers of disconnected connectors
J10
J11
CN53(paper feed), CN233(paper feed)

CN33(side of the control board), CN38(paper feed), CN80(paper feed), CN91(DC drive board), CN122(paper feed),
CN230(paper feed), CN234(paper feed), CN327(paper feed),
CN33(side of the control board), CN38(paper feed, CN80(paper feed), CN91(DC drive board), CN123(paper feed),
CN231(paper feed), CN234(paper feed), CN328(paper feed),
CN13(paper feed), CN203(rear of the control board), CN204(rear of the control board), CN705(DC drive board),
CN720(LCT vertical conveyance), CN721(LCT vertical conveyance), CN726(LCT vertical conveyance)
CN203(rear of the control board), CN204(rear of the control board), CN705(DC driveboard), CN712(LCT horizontal
conveyance), CN714(LCT horizontal conveyance), CN716(LCT horizontal conveyance)
CN64(paper feed), CN73(optical), CN141(paper feed)
CN703(DC drive board), CN713(LCT horizontal conveyance), CN722(LCT relay), CN725(lower left of the rear),
CN727(LCT horizontal conveyance)
CN34(drum), CN62(control board), CN85(on the control board), CN87(2nd paper feed)
CN86(2nd paper feed)
CN32(2nd paper feed), CN42(upper portion of the control board), CN46(2nd paper feed)
CN6(control board), CN40(fusing), CN98(above the DC drive board), CN392(fusing drawer)
CN555(ADU), CN562(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN551(ADU), CN556(ADU)
CN532(ADU), CN534(ADU), CN550(ADU), CN553(ADU), CN557(ADU), CN559(ADU)
CN552(ADU)
J12
J13
J14
J17
J19
J21
J30
J31
J32
J92
J93
J94
J96
Warning
Code
P17
P27
P33
P51
P81
Identification number of disconnected connectors

CN7(control board), CN17(paper feed)
CN5(control board), CN50(above the drum drawer), CN51(drum), CN63(upper left of the rear)
CN530(ADU vertical conveyance), CN561(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN381(upper left of the front), CN395(power supply at the lower right of an exit paper surface)
CN2(power supply at the lower right of an exit paper surface), CN61(control board)
5-16
JAM LIST
Warning
Code
E46
E47
CN8(control board), CN54(upper left of the front surface)

CN396(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface), CN401(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface),
CN425(image processing board), CN430(image processing board), CN481(control board)
CN413(control board), CN471(weekly timer), CN472(weekly timer)
CN23(paper feed)
CN24(paper feed)
CN732(lower left of the rear surface)
CN731(lower right of the rear surface)
CN21(drum), CN39(drum), CN50(above the drum drawer), CN63(upper left of the rear surface)
CN42(above the control board), CN168(2nd paper feed)
CN81(lower right of the DC drive board), CN399(lower of the paper exit surface)
CN98(above the DC drive board), CN392(fusing drawer)
CN66(optical)
CN22(control board), CN67(optical), CN142(left of the optical rear surface)
CN385(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface)
CN428(image processing board), CN450(electronic RDH board)
CN411(A/D board), CN420(image processing board)
CN421(image processing board), CN440(writing)
CN161(upper left of the rear surface)
CN16(above the DC drive board), CN65(control board), CN75(DC drive board), CN96(DC drive board), CN202(DC
drive board), CN203(DC drive board), CN204(above the DC drive board), CN205(above the DC drive board)
E80
F18-1
F18-2
F18-3
F18-4
F22-1
F22-2
F35-1
F36-2
F41-2
F41-4
F43-2
F49-0
F49-1
F49-2
F49-3
F49-4
F49-5
F50
F51
F51-9
F52
F53
F55
F56
F57
F58
F59
E48-2
CN9(control board), CN72(rear of the optical motor), CN74(rear of the optical motor), CN76(rear of the optical motor),
CN92(rear of the optical motor)
CN97(optical)
CN12(lower right of the front surface), CN14(toner replenishing)
CN48(upper left of the front surface), CN329(DC drive board)
CN11(above the control board), CN15(above the control board)
CN49(above the exit paper surface), CN93(above the exit paper surface)
CN94(upper right of the DC drive board), CN521(DC drive board), CN554(ADU), CN564(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN124(upper left of the rear surface), CN125(upper left of the rear surface), CN200(DC drive board), CN201(upper left
of the rear surface)
CN421, CN422, CN423, CN424 (IP board)
5-17
Code
F67
F83-1
CN28(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN382(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface)
CN30(control board), CN88(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN90(DC drive board), CN99(DC drive
board)
CN88(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN99(DC drive board), CN150(control board), CN151(DC
drive board)
CN29(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN60(control board)
CN476(weekly timer), CN477(weekly timer)
F83-2
F83-3
FJ3
Others
Classification
Conditions
Power supply
error
Power supply was not turned ON. CN383(upper left of the front surface), CN390(lower right of the rear
surface), CN393(lower of the rear surface), CN397(lower right power
supply of the paper exiting surface), CN398(weekly timer), CN475(weekly
timer), CN479(weekly timer), CN752(lower right of the rear surface)
Operation unit
error
All LED were not lit.
Image
error
CN1(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN3(control

board), CN4(control board), CN212(operation unit)
CN211(operation unit), CN222(operation unit), CN221(operation unit),
CN227(operation unit)
CN220(operation unit), CN232(operation unit)
CN8(control board), CN213(operation unit), CN215(operation unit),
CN8(control board), CN213(operation unit), CN215(operation unit),
LEDs for special functions were not

lit.
LEDs on the left side were not lit.
The area above the fluorescent
display tube was not lit.
The area below the fluorescent
display tube was not lit.
All keys were not accepted.
The weekly timer display did not
appear.
Special function keys were not CN211(operation unit), CN222(operation unit)
accepted.
Density was faint.
CN17(toner replenishing), CN216(DC drive board), CN217(upper left of the
front surface)
CN62(control board)
White paper
CN84(upper of the rear surface)
Slight dirt on white paper
CN85(above the control board), CN87(2nd paper feed)
Faded image on white paper
CN380(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN384(optical),
Entirely black
CN388(optical), CN400(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface),
CN410(A/D board), CN412(optical)
Front surface and rear surface were CN68(paper feed), CN144(control board), CN145(paper feed), CN147(paper
feed)
slipped.
5-18
JAM LIST
Classification
Error in warmup
Conditions
Warmup is not completed.
Shading is not completed.
Lamp
abnormality
Exposure lamp is not lit.

Upper fusing lamp was not lit.

CN337(lower left of the front fusing), CN81(lower right of the DC driving
board), CN82(upper left of the front), CN399(lower of exited paper surface)
CN78(power source of the lower right of the exit paper surface), CN95(writing
portion of the paper feed surface), CN223(control board), CN224(optical
drive board), CN225(optical drive board), CN226(optical drive board),
CN228(optical drive board), CN320(writing), CN321(writing)
CN381(lower left of the front surface), CN384(optical), CN385(power
source of the lower right of the exited paper surface), CN388(optical)
CN81(lower right of the DC drive board), CN399(lower of exit paper surface)
CN29(power source of the lower left of the exit paper surface), CN81(lower
right of the DC drive board), CN380(power source of the lower left of the exit
paper surface)
CN20(drum), CN31(upper of the rear surface), CN70(upper left of the rear
Adhesion of carrier
surface)
Front edge or rear edge was dirty. CN31(upper of the rear surface), CN71(upper of the control board)
CN73(optical), CN77(optical)
Touch the right side of optical.
Upward/downward elevation motor CN25(paper feed), CN58(paper feed), CN59(paper feed), CN79(paper
continued to rotate. (Gear is feed)
damaged)
LCT elevation motor continued to CN701(DC drive board), CN711(1500LCT), CN724(1000LCT), CN728(1000
LCT drawer)
rotate. (Gear is damaged)
CN41(upper left of the front surface)
Total counter was not operated.
CN137(optical), CN143(optical), CN146(optical), CN152(left of the rear of
APS did not function.
optical)
CN130(optical), CN133(optical), CN134(optical), CN138(optical), CN163(left
APS sensed erroneously.
of the rear of optical)
FIN did not recognize (Only G mode CN43(power source of the lower left of the exit paper surface), CN101(right
could be selected or not operated.) (lower) of rear surface), CN114(control board)
CN102(right (upper) of the rear surface), CN116(control board)
ADF was not recognized.
CN505(ADU drawer), CN510(DC drive board), CN531(ADU)
ADF was not recognized.
(Only 1-1 and 2-1 could be
recognized.)
The upper/lower step tray could not CN56(rear of the control board)
be recognized.
CN120(control board), CN121(DC drive board), CN706(DC drive board),
LCT was not recognized.
CN709(1500LCT drawer), CN733(LCT stand), CN734(LCT stand)
Lower fusing lamp was not lit.
Dirt
Operation
error
Recognition
abnormality
5-19
Classification
Recognition
error
Others
Conditions
Paper on a tray was not detected.
(There is a paper display that a
paper will be replaced.)
Weekly timer did not recognize.
Verticle downward movement
occurred in the vicinity of ADU inlet.
J21 did not appear during drumwinding jamming.

CN44(paper feed), CN45(paper feed), CN47(paper feed)
CN710(1500LCT), CN723(1000LCT)
CN413(control board), CN471(weekly timer), CN472(weekly timer)
CN560(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN324(upper of the control board), CN325(lower of the drum drawer)
5-20
ADJUSTMENTS
HOW TO USE THE

ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
REPLACING PARTS
This section details adjustments and procedures. Use this

section for making adjustments and as a checklist before
implementing corrective measures in the field.
Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not only

required when a defective copy image occurs, but also after
replacing or reinstalling certain parts.
1.
2.
3.
How to Use the Tables

The following items are used in the tables throughout this
section.
Does the power supply meet the requirements?

Is the power supply properly grounded?
Is the machine sharing its power source with another high
current consumption machine that draws large currents
intermittently? (e.g. an elevator, air conditioner, or other
source of electrical consumption)
4. Is the installation environment suitable?
a. Keep out of high temperature, high humidity, direct sun
light and poor ventilation.
b. Make sure that the floor where the machine is installed
is level.
5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in the original
itself?
6. Is the density adjusting control at the proper position?
7. Are the platen glass and ADF conveyance belt clean?
8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy?
9. Are the copying materials at the end of their usable life?
(developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.)
10. Is there toner in the machine?
Mode
Indicates the adjustment mode.
[47] : 47 mode
[25] : 25 mode
[36] : 36 mode
[35] : 35 mode
[ ] : Normal mode
Code
It shows the code used in each mode and a copy quantity
setting button.
VR
[] None
Indicates the VR number on the CB1 (main body control
board).
Indicates the board name when neither VR or DSW
applies.
The following items should also be observed when repairing

the machine.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Page
Only one side of the AC power line is disconnected when

the main switch of this machine is turned OFF. Always
unplug the machine before beginning work. If it is absolutely
necessary to work with the power ON, exercise care to
avoid being caught in the rear scanning portion of the
exposure unit.
Special care should be taken when handling the fusing
unit since it operates at extremely high temperatures.
The developing unit is surrounded by a strong magnetic
field. Keep watches and metering equipment away from it.
Avoid damaging the drum with tools or similar objects.
Do not touch the IC pins with your bare hands.
Indicates the page to refer to in the adjustment section.
Conditions
New:
Indicates adjustment (including check) is required

when replacing a new part.
Reset: Indicates adjustment (including check) is required
when a part has been reinstalled.
Symbols used in the tables

1
(Empty circle):
6-1
Indicates there is a priority sequence

for adjustments (including checks)
and settings.
Indicates adjustments (including
checks) and settings that can be carried out independently.
Part Name
Adjustment of gradation
16
Linearity evaluation pattern
15
Tray paper size setting
14
Optical brake amount adjustment
13
Paper feeding loop amount adjustment
12
Lead-to-trail magnification adjustment
11
Adjustment the amount of erasing the front edge of the original
10
Electronic RDH type front edge timing adjustment
Copy type front edge timing adjustment
L detection adjustment
Developing bias adjustment
Charge grid voltage adjustment
Separation (DC) current adjustment
Separation (AC) current adjustment
Transfer current adjustment
Mode
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
36
36
36
36
36
36
25
35
35
Code
002 003 004 006 007 011 095
91
98
92
93
94
96 67-9 16
80
Page
7-2
Adjustment and setting item

No.
Charge corona current adjustment
No.
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-6 7-31 7-32 7-32 7-31 7-30 7-33 7-19 7-44 7-55
7-56
Condition
Drum
New
Developer
New
Charge corona wire
New
Charge corona control plate
New
Transfer/separation corona wire
New
High voltage unit 1
New
High voltage unit 2
New
Optics wire
New
Write unit
10
Memory IC
11
Setting the lower tray paper size
New
-
New means replace with a new part and reset means to reset the part.
The circles will have a number when there is an adjustment priority.
6-2
ADJUSTMENTS
SETTING AND CHECKING WITH THE P FUNCTION

Confirmation of the PM Count and
Resetting
The P function is capable of installing and confirming various

settings.
To confirm an item, enter its number using the copy quantity
buttons, while pressing the P button. On the copy quantity
display or the message display, the current value is displayed.
To change an item, refer to the appropriate page.
Confirmation Method
Step
1
List of Confirmation Item by Means of the

P Function
There are 6 items which can be confirmed items using the P

function.
Item
Total count
Operation button
P + 1
Density shift
P + 3
Developing count
P + 4
PM count
P + 5
Drum count
P + 7
ECM/data control
P + 9
Operation point
Operation (display)
While pressing the P button, press P button,
copy quantity
copy quantity button 5.
button
Confirm the PM count on the
message display.
Resetting Method
Remarks
Reinitialization
impossible
Reinitialization
possible (See
the next page.)
Reinitialization
possible (See
47-95 mode.)
Reinitialization
possible (See
47-90 mode.)
Reinitialization
possible (See
47-91 mode.)
Reinitialization
possible (See
data control.)
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6-3
Operation (display)
While pressing the page quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Press 090 using the copy quantity
button.
Press the start print button.
Input a start date using the copy
quantity button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
button,
main switch
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Setting the Density Shift
Service Data Control Operation Mode

Access
Setting Method
Note: Mode 25 address 25 must be set to 2 and address 52

to 8 to allow entry into this mode.
Step
1
3
4
Operation point
Operation (display)
copy quantity
button
Confirm the density shift display (1
to 5) on the message display (see
*1).
Select a mode by means of a char- Character/photograph button
acter/photograph button.
Input a density shift number which Copy quantity
is requested to change by means button
of the copy quantity setting button
Press F1 in the menu selection Menu selection
button
button.
Step
1
2
*1 :Relation between the copy quantity button and the density

shift.
Copy quantity setting button
1
2
3
4
5
Density shift
Dark 2
Dark 1
Standard
Light 1
Light 2
5
6
7
8
Confirmation of the Drum Count and

Resetting
Refer to the table on page 6-5 for additional information.
Confirmation Method
Step
1
Operation point
Operation (display)
copy quantity
button
Confirm the drum count by means
of a message display.
Resetting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation (display)
While pressing the page quantity
switch.
Press 091 using the copy quantity
buttons.
Input a start date by means of the
copy quantity buttons.
Revised 3/98
Operation point
Main switch
Copy quantity
button,
main switch
Enter the password - if none has Copy quantity
been set, enter 0000000. The button
display goes to {Service Control
Operation Mode] when a valid
password is entered.
Select one of the desired items: Copy quantity
button
1: Limit parts count
2: Read parts copy count
3: Parts count reset
4:
-------5: Read jam count
6:
-------7: Read mode copy count
8: Read SC count
Start print button
Enter the selected item.
Scroll through the entries within UP/DOWN buttons
the selected mode.
STOP/CLEAR
To return to step 1, above.
buttons
Turn the unit OFF and back ON Main switch
again to return to normal printer
operation.
Operation (display)
If the unit is ON, turn it OFF.
Press the [P] button while turning
the power ON.
Operation point
Copy quantity
button,
main switch
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
6-4
ADJUSTMENTS
Function to Control Data

In order to utilize the data control function, it is necessary to register a master key code in advance. Items capable of being confirmed
or installed with this function are different depending upon the data input in the P05, P25 and P52 addresses in the 25 mode.
Data Control Function Item

This chart shows the relationship between the data input in the P05, P25 and P52 addresses in the 25 mode and the control item
number.
25
Mode
Address No.
P05
P25
P52
Setting data
0
0
0
0
1
0
--
--
Control item number.
0
2
0
0
2
8
Individual spare part

quantity limit setting.
Detailed procedure 3
See *3
Individual spare part

quantity limit setting.
See *3
Display individual spare

part copy limit.
See *3.
Display individual spare

part copy limit.
See *3.
Copy quantity count reset for each spare part.

See *3.
Copy quantity count reset for each spare part.

See *3.
--
--
--
--
Displaying copy count for

each size.
See *1.
Displaying copy count for

each size.
See *1.
ADF/RDH paper feed ADF/RDH paper feed

count.
count.
Reset of counters.
All reset
Individual reset
See *2.
Jam frequency count by

location.
See *5.
--
--
--
--
--
See
*4.
See
--
--
*4.
Jam frequency count by

location.
See *5.
Copy quantity count for

each mode used.
See *6.
Counting the number of
SC occurrences.
See *7.
P05 = 0 : ECM is not selected; 1 : select the ECM (no stop in limit); 2 : select the ECM (stop after copy operation); 3 : select
the ECM (stop immediately)
P25 = 0 : protection; 1 : cancel copy control protection; 2 : cancel service control protection
P52 = 0 : no function; 8 : cancel protection;
6-5
Revised 3/98
Operation Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
5
* 1 Calling Copy Count for Each Size
Operation point
Operation (display)
copy quantity
button
Input a master key code (8 digits). Copy quantity
button
Copy quantity
Input a control item number (*)
button
Start print button
Press the start print button. (*)
(*)
In the case of 1, 4, 6, 7 , 8, and 9
5-1 Select an item.
In the case of 5
5-1 Select a counter number.
5-2 Press the start print button.
In the case of 3
5-1 Select an item.
5-2 Set limit number.
In the case of 2 (all reset)
Reduction/magnification button
5-2 Select a counter number

6
7
Paper size
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11
8.5x5.5
5.5x8.5
8.5x14
8.5x11
10
Bypass feed
* 2 Copy Count Reset (Individual Reset) for Each Size

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Start print button
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Paper size
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11
8.5x5.5
5.5x8.5
8.5x14
8.5x11
Bypass feed
* 3 Copy Quantity Limit Setting for Each Spare Part

Copy Quantity Count Calling for Each Spare Part
Copy Quantity Count Resetting for Each Spare Part
Start print
button
In the case 2 (individual reset)

5-1 Press the stop/clear button.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
No.
1~20
21
22
Paper size
Counting copy frequency.
Counting frequency of manual paper feeding copy.
Counting frequency of the main body upper step
paper feeding.
Counting frequency of the main body lower step
23
paper feeding.
Counting frequency of the PFU upper step paper
24
feeding.
Counting frequency of the PFU lower step paper
25
feeding.
Counting copy frequency of the ADU paper feeding.
26
Counting copy frequency of the main body paper
27
ejecting.
28~30 Counting frequency of ADU paper feeding.
Stop/clear
button
Red/mag button
Start print button
Stop/clear
button
the stop/clear button and return to stop/clear
button
the normal mode.
Press the stop/clear button. (*)
* : Repeat procedures 3 through 6 if necessary.
6-6
ADJUSTMENTS
* 6 Counting Copying Number for Each Mode Used
* 4 Counting the Number of ADF Paper Feeding
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Paper feed mode

ADF/RDH
RADF/RRDH
RDH(sort, staple sort)
RRDH(sort, staple sort)
No.
1
2
3
4
6
* 5 Counting the Frequency of Jamming for Each Origin
Point
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Jamming
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J16
J17
J19
J21
J31
J32
J61
J62
J63
J72
J75
J92
J93
J94
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J11-4
No.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Jamming
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J14-4
J30
J74
J95
J96
J10-2
J10-4
J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J17-4
J17-5
J17-6
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
6-7
Copy mode
Copy quantity in one side>one side mode.
Copy quantity in one side>both side mode.
Copy quantity in both sides>one side mode.
Copy quantity in both sides>both side mode.
Copy quantity from one side to one side when using
the ADF.
Copy quantity from one side to both sides when
using the ADF.
Copy quantity in a staple sort mode.
Copy quantity in a sort mode.
Copy quantity in a group mode.
Frequency of staple.
Copy quantity in the same magnification.
Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 1.41/2.00.
Copy quantity in an arbitrary magnification.
Copy quantity in a zoom magnification.
Copy quantity in the maximum magnification of
2.00.
Copy quantity in the minimum magnification of 0.50.
Copy quantity in the AMS mode.
Copy quantity in the APS mode.
Copy quantity in the AES mode.
Copy quantity in the interruption mode.
Copy quantity in the manual feeding mode.
Copy quantity in the page continuous copying mode.
Copy quantity in the frame erasure mode.
Copy quantity in the folding erasure mode.
Copy quantity in the same magnification image shift
mode.
Copy quantity in the reduction magnification image
shift mode.
Copy quantity in a thick paper mode.
Copy quantity in a thin paper mode.
Copy quantity in an inter-sheet 1.
Copy quantity in an inter-sheet 2.
Copy quantity in an OHP mode.
Copy quantity in a mixed mode.
Reading frequency of a job memory.
Frequency of utilizing a pre-heating mode.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 1.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 2 to 5.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 6 to 10.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 11 or
more.
Copy start frequency in intersheet 1.
Copy start frequency in intersheet 2.
No.
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
* 7 Counting Frequency of the Occurrence of Service

Call
F/E code
F/E code
No.
No.
F18-1
F22-2
1
36
F18-2
2
37
F18-3
F28-3
3
38
F18-4
F43-1
4
39
F28-1
F43-2
5
40
F28-2
F43-3
6
41
F34-1
F43-4
7
42
F34-2
8
43
F35-1
9
44
F35-2
10
45
F36-1
11
46
F36-2
12
47
13
48
F51-1
14
49
F51-2
15
50
F41-4
F51-3
16
51
F51-4
17
52
F51-5
18
53
F51-6
19
54
F51-7
20
55
F51-8
21
56
F51-9
22
57
F52-1
23
58
F52-2
24
59
F52-3
25
60
F52-4
26
61
F52-5
27
62
F52-6
28
63
F52-7
29
64
30
65
31
66
32
67
33
68
34
69
F22-1
35
70
Copy mode
Copy quantity in photographic mode.
Quantity of paper feeding in DF thick paper.
Frequency of using a lengthwise/widthwise magnification change mode.
Frequency of using a book memory.
Frequency of using a single step.
Frequency of using a character/photograph mode.
Frequency of using a character mode.
Frequency of using an arbitrary density.
Frequency of using an OHP mode 2.
Frequency of using an intersheet 3.
Frequency of using an intersheet 4.
Frequency of using an inserted page.
Frequency of using a chapter control.
Frequency of using a compound copy.
Frequency of using a repeat copy
Frequency of using a black and white reversing.
Frequency of using a outside document.
Frequency of using printer mode
Revised 3/98
6-8
DIAGNOSTICS
47 MODE AND MULTIMODE

Setting the 47 Mode and Multimode
e. Press the stop/clear button to disable the output.

f. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 47 mode.
47 Model
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions by activating I/O
(input/output) checks of loads and signals. Various adjustments
are also performed in this mode.
Setting method
a. Turn the main switch OFF.
b. Turn the main switch back ON while pressing down on the
4 and 7 copy quantity buttons.
c. To check input signals
(1) Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the
desired signal (sensors, etc.) by referring to the I/O
check list.
(2) The level of the signal (Hi or Lo) will appear on the
magnification display.
Note: Hi and Lo indicate the signal level applied to the CB,
it does not pertain to the mechanical state of the sensor
or switch. The mechanical position of the sensor or
switch with respect to what signal it produces at the CB
is dependent upon its function in the copier.
d. To check outputs loads
(1) Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the
desired output (load, etc.) by referring to the I/O check
list.
(2) Press the start print button.
Depending on the output, a load will be activated or a
signal will be output.
Start print button Code
Before pressing Input
Output
After pressing
2. Multimode
This mode exists within the 47 mode. It enables multiple I/
O checks from a single I/O check code. The functions that
support the multimode are indicated by an M marked in
the I/O check code list.
Setting Method
a. Enter the 47 mode.
b. Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the
desired I/O. (Only codes that support the multimode can be
used.)
c. Press the P button.
d. The standard mode (existing within the multimode) will
flash on the copy quantity display.
e. Enter the desired multimode number using the copy quantity
buttons.
f. The multimode number will flash on the copy quantity
display.
g. Press the P button.
h. Press the start print button.
i. After setting the multimode, perform the check in accordance
with the requirements of the particular 47 mode I/O check.
j. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 47 multimode.
Description
Input signal level indication
Output load operation/signal
7-1
Initializing the NVRAM
Adjustments Required after Initialization
This procedure (1) details the steps required to initialize the

7050 NVRAM, (2) specifies the adjustments that MUST be reset
afterward, and (3) presents the steps for storing of the new
adjustment data and restoring the data to previous settings if
required. Initialization is required if the NVRAM becomes
defective and needs to be replaced, if the stored data in memory
becomes corrupted, or in need of a fresh start to reset machine
parameters.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all counter values (to factory
settings) within the 25, 35, 36, and 47 modes. It is important to
follow the procedure as given below to properly reset the
copier.
The following adjustments must be accomplished in the order

given, in particular, adjustments 2 through 6, after the initialization
procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Setting Method
Important note: Assuming that the developer in the machine is
good and does not need replacing, enter mode 47, code 17, and
record the L-detection reference data before proceding with the
initialization, which will reset this value. Reenter this recorded
data after the initialization process is completed. If this step is
not performed, new developer will have to be added and the Ldetection adjustment performed.
Step
Operation (display)
1
While pressing copy quantity
switch.
2
Select address P00 and enter 0
at this address.
4
5
Turn OFF the machine, then, while

pressing copy quantity buttons 4
and 7, turn ON the main switch.
Input 092 using the copy quantity
buttons.
Press the START/PRINT button
and turn OFF the machine.
Reselect the 25 mode and enter
9 at address P00 using the normal
procedures.
Exit the mode.
Adjustment
Charge corona grid
Horizontal magnification
Lead edge timing (copy)
Lead edge timing (ERDH)
Lead edge erase
Loop timing
L-detection *
Paper size settings for trays 2, 3, and 4
Gradation
Mode/Code
47/007
36/093
36/091
36/098
36/092
36/094
47/095
25/069
35/080/P6 (LD1)
35/080/P7 (LD2)
Can be omitted if the current value at mode 47, code 17, is

recorded before the initialization process (47/092) is
performed, and this value is reentered after the initialization.
Storing all Settings into Memory

Enter mode 47, code 096, to store the data from the above
adjustments into NVRAM.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Magnification/
reduction button
or the P and
copy quantity
buttons
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
START PRINT
button, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
To Restore Data Back to Mode 47, Code 096,

Settings
If changes to the setting(s) were made after the data was stored
to NVRAM using mode 47, code 096, enter mode 47, code 093
to restore the setting(s) back to the last mode 47, code 096
memory save.
IMPORTANT NOTE on DMAX
When initialization is performed, the value at mode 47, code
050, which is the control value for both the developer rotation
speed and D-max, is set to a factory default of 2 ...
(1) This value will not cause any problems if the fusing heater
temperature at the time the unit is turned ON is below 50 C
because a D-max correction will automatically be performed;
however...
(2) if the fusing heater temperature is above 50 C at the time
of power ON, D-max correction MUST be accomplished by
placing the unit in mode 47, code 18, and pressing the START/
PRINT button.
If you are not sure about the machine temperature, perform the
D-max manually.
Failure to accomplish this step when required

will result in extremely light copies.
Revised 3/99
7-2
DIAGNOSTICS
Charge Corona Current Adjustment
Separation (AC) Current Adjustment
Setting Method
Setting Method
Step
Operation (display)
1
switch.
2
Enter 002 using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity display indicates 2.
3
Press the P button.
4
The existing data will flash on the
display.
5
Using the copy quantity buttons,
enter the value necessary to adjust
the charge corona current to within
standards.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255

Target value = 170
Amount of change per step :
about 1.2A
Press the P button.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Step
1
P button
3
4
Copy quantity
buttons
3
4
5
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
Standard value (targeted) : 100

P button
6

about 1.5 A
Press the P button.
P button
Separation (DC) Current Adjustment
Setting Method
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the P button.
display.
enter the correct value to adjust
the transfer current to within
standards.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Transfer Current Adjustment
Step
1
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the P button.
display.
the AC separation current to within
standards.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Setting Method
Step
1
2
P button
3
4
Copy quantity
buttons
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the P button.
display.
the DC separation current to within
standards.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons


about 0.5 A
Press the P button.

P button
7-3

about 0.6 A
Press the P button.
P button
Revised 3/99
Charge Grid Voltage Adjustment
(3) 47-007 mode. (above procedure item 1 and 2)

(4) Start print button ON.
(5) Check the meter value.
(6) Adjust by using steps 3 to 6 in the setting method
procedure.
Setting Method
Step
1
3
4
5
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the P button.
display.
the charging grid voltage to within
standards.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Developing Bias Adjustment

Setting method
Step
1
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
3
4


about 1.6 A
Press the P button.
P button
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the P button.
display.
the developing bias to within
standards.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
When Replacing the Drum

(1) Check the standard of the new drum written on the inside
of the flange.
(2) Set the metter.
+ grid pin
- ground
Range DC1000V
7-4

about 1.2 volts
Press the P button.
P button
DIAGNOSTICS
Test Pattern Density Selection
Adjustment Mode List
Setting Method
This feature displays the adjustment available with this

machine; however, these adjustments are not selectable by
this means.
Step
1
3
4
5
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the P button.
display.
enter the value corresponding to
the test pattern desired.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Setting method
Step
1
2
P button
3
Copy quantity
buttons
4
Note: This setting selects the

desired overall halftone test pattern
that is generated within the mode
35, code 01. The following test
patterns can be selected: 0: white,
70: halftone, 255: black
P button
Press the P button.
Initial Setting
This setting reinitializes the machine back to the initial
factory settings.
Setting Method
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Reduction/
magnification
button
*1: See the adjustment mode list in this section for a complete
listing of these adjustment items.
Note: After completing the test pattern output, restore the

value to 255.
Step
1
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the start print button. An
item and corresponding data are
displayed.
Press the reduction/magnification
button to select a different
adjustment item (*1).
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
7-5
L-Detection Adjustment
Telephone Number Setting
When performing this adjustment, the toner density is

automatically sensed. The voltage corresponding to the
concentration of toner in the new developer will be memorized.
Note: Perform this adjustment during machine setup or when
replacing developer. If developer that is being used is
adjusted, the toner density of the developer in use will
become the reference value, resulting in an incorrect
adjustment value.
This feature is used to register telephone numbers.

Telephone numbers are displayed on the message display
for generation service calls.
Setting Method
Step
1
Setting Method
Step
1
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
The stirring screw in the
developing unit rotates and the
L-detection sensor detects the
developer density.
After about 5 minutes, sensing
automatically stops and ADJ
OK is displayed.
2
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
4
Start print button
5
6
7-6
Operation (display)
switch.
buttons.
Press the start print button. The
following will be displayed:
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
TEL NO.
XXX-XXX-XXXX
Enter the telephone number using Copy quantity
the copy quantity buttons. Press P buttons, start
print button
for a dash (-).
Set/F1 button
Stop/clear
Press the set/F1 button.
button
Press the stop/clear button.
DIAGNOSTICS
Input Check List

Classification Code
Analog signal
Paper feed
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
012
020
022
023
Optics
030
Multi
mode
DCPS2
TLD
TCSB
TCSB
TCSB
*1
*2
M
M
*3
PS14
PS20
PS19
PS144
PS146
PS25
PS11
PS160
PS158
PS24
PS7
PS3
PS5
PS4
Name
CVR FB signal
Toner level detecting signal
Internal temperature detecting signal
TH1 signal
TH2 signal
Humidity sensor signal
TH1
TH2
016
019
Paper feed
and
conveyance
Symbol
Dmax MONI signal

Dmax signal
Drum jamming signal
No-paper detecting signal
Contents of M:
Tray upper limit detecting
Common to 10, 12, 16, & 19
Paper size signal
1: Main body upper
Display for each paper size
2: Main body lower
11x17:7, 8.5x14:6, 8.5x11R:8,
3: LCT right
8.5x11:5, 5.5x8.5R:C, 5.5x8.5:1
4: LCT left
Only to 10
Pre-try detecting
5: Bypass feed
Paper feed sensor signal
1: 2nd paper feed stop signal
2: Intermediate conveyance sensor
3: Optical synchronization sensor
4: LCT conveyance sensor (1000)
5: LCT horizontal conveyance sensor (1500)
Paper exit sensor signal
Interlock signals
1: Paper conveyance door
2: LCT interlock
3: ADU interlock
4: Fuser level detect
Optics sensor signals
1: Optics return/home
2: Shading
3: Optics return/home
4: Registration
State of display and

signal source
H
L
Normal Abnormal
Yes
No
No paper
OFF
Paper
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
6: ADF/EE
7: Over run
PS2
PS1
048
Main body ROM version

P-001-P to display C1 ROM version
049
Processing ROM version

P-001-P to display I1 ROM version
P-002-P to display I2 ROM version
Main body
Note: 47-197 - START/PRINT displays installed ERDH SIMM

memory in Mbs.
*1 - PS12, PS13, PS15, PS140, PS141 *2 - PS16, PS17, PS142, PS143 *3 - PS20, PS21, PS200, PS210
7-7
Revised 3/98
Classification Code
Intrinsic
function
ADF
and
RADF
Sorter
and
Finisher
Multi
mode
050
Name
Checking whether or not a connector is connected

1: A/D board connection (CN420)
2: LD1 board connection (CN421)
3: LD2 board connection (CN422)
4: INDEX board connection (CN423)
5: Sub scanning correction motor connection (CN424)
6: Scanner I/F board connection (CN426)
7: CFF I/F board connection (CN427)
8: Electronic RDH board connection (CN428)
9: Printer I/F board connection (CN429)
Interlock signals
1: ADF open/close interlock
2: Reversal portion interlock
060
MS301
MS302
064
PS301
DF306
1: No paper detecting
069
Signal for connect ADF

1: DF306
079
Signal for connect finisher

1: FS-102
080
ADU
Symbol
082
PS158
Interlock signal
PS152
PS153
PS157
PS154
PS156
PS151
PS155
Paper
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
detecting signal
Paper feed
Reversal detect
Vertical conveyance
Paper exit 1
Paper exit 3
No paper
Paper exit 2
State of display and

signal source
L
H
Connect
Notconnect
OPEN
CLOSE
PAPER
NO
PAPER
ADF
NO
ADF
FS
NO FS
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
089
Signal for connect ADU
7-8
DIAGNOSTICS
Output Check List

Classification Code
Analog signal
Temporary
Paper feed
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
Symbol
L1
M10
HV1
HV2
HV2
HV2
HV2
HV1
HV1
HV1
020
SD1
SD2
SD141
SD140
SD3
021
M13
M13
M140
022
MC5
MC6
CL1
CL2
MC7
Multi
mode
Exposure lamp
Toner supply motor
Charging
Transfer
Separation (AC)
Transfer + separation (AC + DC)
Separation (DC)
Grid
Dmax / LED
JAM detecting LED
Guide plate
Bias
M
M
Test pattern density

correction level adjustment
M
M
L-detection reference data

Dmax level adjustment
M
M
M
M
M
M
Do not adjust these

settings in the field.
Name

1: Main body, upper
3: LCT, right (1000)
5: Bypass feed
2: Main body, lower

4: LCT left (1500)
Paper feed motor

1: High speed - paper feeding (main body)
2: Low speed - bypass feed (main body)
3: LCT
1st paper feed clutch
1: Main body, upper
3: LCT, right (1000)
5: Bypass feed
2: Main body, lower

4: LCT, left (1500)
023
Optics
024
025
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
MC8
MC3
SD4
Intermediate conveyance clutch

2nd paper feed clutch
Separation claw solenoid
M12
M5
Optical return trip driving

Polygon motor
Polygon motor + APC
Shading correction + AGC + AOC
Platen AES operation
Laser 1 PWM (pulse width modulation)
Laser 2 PWM
Correction of sub-scanning beam
M
M
7-9
X
X
X
Revised 3/99
Classification Code
040
041
Symbol
M1
M4
Multi
mode
M
FM16, FM2
FM14
042
FM11
FM22
FM152
Main body
Intrinsic
function
043
044
C(T)
M7, M8
045
L2,L4
046
047
048
049
050
M7
M8
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
PCL
PSL
M35
M10
060
M301
M3
M7
M8
M
064
069
RADF
080
ADU
Adjustment
process and
others
084
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
Revised 3/99
M151
CL151
CL152
CL153
SD152
M
M
M
Name
Main motor (1-31; use 16)
Drum motor
Fan motor
1: Main fan
2: Optical fan
3: Suction fan
4: Image processing fan
5: Electronic RDH fan
6: ADU fan
7: Developing fan
Total counter
Charge cleaning mtr -> Trans./Sep. cleaning mtr (continuous)
Fusing heater lamp
1: Thin paper mode
2: Standard mode
3: Thick paper mode
Charge cleaning motor
Transfer/separation cleaning motor
Operation unit (all are lit)
Buzzer
Setting the rotation number of the developing driving motor in
400 dpi
PCL
PSL
Developing screw motor
Toner supply motor
Message test
Charge cleaning motor, returning
Transfer/separation cleaning motor, returning
Drive (DF306)
1: Conveyance belt (forward)
2: Conveyance belt (reverse)
Switch (DF 306)
1: Paper feeding plate solenoid
2: Paper feeding solenoid
3: Reversing solenoid
4: Swing back solenoid
5: Speed reduction paper exiting solenoid
Test mode
1: Single-sided document continuously
2: Single-sided document one by one
3: Double-sided document continuously
4: Double-side document one by one
ADU paper feed motor
ADU load
1: Clockwise clutch
2: Counterclockwise clutch
3: Conveyance clutch
4: Longitudinal conveyance solenoid
PM counter clear
Process counter clear
1: Drum counter
Process initial setting (all settings)
Initial setting (data return in delivery from process) 36 mode
Adjustment mode list display mode* (see page 7-12)
L-detection reference value automatic adjustment (developing
counter reset)
Process delivery completing setting 25/36 mode
Lighting adjustment
1: Mode 1
2: Mode 2
Transfer and separation humidity setting
Unvolatile reference mode
7-10
Do not adjust these

setttngs in the field.
X
X
DIAGNOSTICS
Classification Code
600dpi mode
Special mode
103
104
106
107
111
136
137
140
150
160
180
190
191
192
193
197
198
199
Symbol
HV2
HV2
HV2
HV1
HV1
M1
M3
Multi
mode
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Name
Transfer
Separation (AC)
Separation (DC)
Grid
Bias
Laser 1 PWM
Laser 2 PWM
Main motor speed
Setting the rotation number of the developing driving motor in
600 dpi
Setting password of the weekly timer (0000 = no password)
Telephone number setting
AGC setting
AOC setting
Setting a targeted value of white correction
Setting a targeted value of black correction
Checking the SIMM volume of the electronic RDH
Checking SIMM of the electronic RDH
Setting offset quantity for correcting sub-scanning slip
Additional codes:
120
114
Adjusts the printer mode to be automatically set in the NOVRAM

for charge, grid, transfer, separation, bias, and laser power.
Starts gamma auto. compensation.
7-11
Do not adjust these

settings in the field.
X
X
X
X
Adjustment Mode List

List of adjustments
Contents of message
1st line
Data (referential value)
2nd line
1. Charge current
CHARGE (1) ADJ
47-002+P
170
0~255
2. Transfer current
TRANSFER (1) ADJ
47-003+P
0~255
3. Separation (AC) current
SEPARAT (AC)(1)ADJ
47-004+P
4. Separation (DC) current
SEPARAT (DC))(1)ADJ
47-006+P
5. Grid voltage
GRID (1) ADJ
47-007+P
50
(87 outside Japan)
100
(100 outside Japan)
67
(57 outside Japan)
145
47-011+P
169
0~255
6. Developing bias
BIAS (1) ADJ
Nonadjustable
Data from 47-92 mode Range of data
0~255
0~255
0~255
7. Transfer current
TRANSFER (2) ADJ
(600dpi)
8. Separation (AC) current SEPARAT (AC)(2)ADJ
(600dpi)
9. Separation (DC) current SEPARAT (DC)(2)ADJ
(600dpi)
10. Grid voltage (600dpi)
GRID (2) ADJ
47-103+P
0~255
47-104+P
0~255
47-106+P
0~255
47-107+P
0~255
11. Developing bias

(600dpi)
12. Adjusting Dmax level
BIAS (2) ADJ
47-111+P
0~255
Dmax ADJ
47-018+P
50
0~255
13. Laser 1 PWM (600dpi)
LD1 POWER (1)
47-036+P
88
0~99
LD2 POWER (1)
47-037+P
88
0~99
LD1 POWER (2)
47-136+P
50
0~99
LD2 POWER (2)
47-137+P
50
0~99
17. LD1 offset adjustment

(400dpi)
(400dpi)
(600dpi)
(600dpi)
21. Separation claw ON
LD1 OFFSET (1)
35-005+P+3
20
-64~+64
LD2 OFFSET (1)
35-005+P+4
20
-64~+64
LD1 OFFSET (2)
35-005+P+7
20
-64~+64
LD2 OFFSET (2)
35-005+P+8
20
-64~+64
SEPARATOR CLAW ON
25-01+P
0~9
22. Separation claw OFF
SEPARATOR CLAW OFF
25-02+P
0~9
23. Adjustment one-sided
LD CENTERING (1)ADJ
36-097+P
-32~+32
24. SGU adjustment onesided (table)
LD CENTERING (2)ADJ
35-016+P
-32~+32
Note: If 47/94 will not display, use 47/96 to turn ON. 47/92 will disable 47/94.
Revised 3/98
7-12
DIAGNOSTICS
Contents of message
List of adjustments
1st line
2nd line
25. 5.5x8.5R backside is

35-031+P
CENTERING (A5R) ADJ
one-sided
26. Lead edge timing
36-091+P
REGISTRATION (2)
(first copy)
REGISTRATION (1)
27. Lead edge timing (E36-098+P
RDH: second copy)
28. Lead edge timing
36-099+P
REGISTRATION (3)
(printer)
29. Erased amount of the
36-092+P
IMAGE MISSING ADJ
lead edge of document
30. Longitudinal magnifica36-093+P
MAGNIFI (1) ADJ
tion adjustment
31. SGU longitudinal magnifi35-016+P+2
MAGNIFI (2) ADJ
cation adjustment
32. Adjustment of loop amount LOOP ADJUST (TRAY)
36-094+P
of paper feeding (tray)
33. Adjustment of loop amount LOOP ADJUST (BYPASS)
36-094+P
of paper feeding (bypass)
34. Adjustment of optical
36-096+P
BRAKE ADJUST
brake amount
35. Rotation number of
47-050+P
DEVELOPING MOTOR (1)
developing motor
36. Rotation number of
47-150+P
DEVELOPING MOTOR (2)
developing motor (600dpi)
37. Absolute position of
LD1 POSITION
laser 1
38. Absolute position of
LD2 POSITION
laser 2
39. Sub-scanning slip
35-80+P+5
VERTICAL SHIFT
amount
40. Main-scanning slip
35-80+P+5
HORIZONTAL SHIFT
amount
41. AOC1 data
AOC CH1 Vol.
42. AOC2 data
43. AGC1 data
44. AGC2 data
45. Copy quantity in tray 1
AOC CH2 Vol.
TRAY 3
TRAY 4
+51
-94~+99
(-99~+99)
-100~+99
(-99~+99)
-100~+99
(-99~+99)
-99~+99
+28
0~99
-20
-20~+20
16
-1~31
+10
-20~+90
+60
-20~+90
7
17
0~9
(-9~+9)
1~32
1~32
+24
+29
See note
below
X
X
00998
01060
62
00524
68
84
45
AGC CH2 Vol.
TRAY 2
44
AGC CH1 Vol.
TRAY 1
Nonadjustable
0~999999
0~999999
0~999999
0~999999
Note pertaining to adjustments 26, 27, and 28:

Mode 25, address 89 must be set to a number other than 1 before adjustment items #26 and #27 will function. However, the alternatives for these
adjustments located under modes 36 and 35 of this DIAGNOSTICS Section can be used in lieu of resetting 25/89. Note that the registration for Superfine
mode MUST be accomplished using 35/80 + P5 because ERDH memory is not used. For all other modes, 36/98 or 36/80 + P5 are used.
7-13
Revised 3/99
Contents of message
List of adjustments
1st line
2nd line
49. Bypass feed copy

quantity
50. ADU copy quantity
COPY COUNT(BYPASS)
0~999999
COPY COUNT(ADU)
0~999999
51. Dmax error (1) *1
D-MAX ERROR(1)
0~255
D-MAX ERROR(2)
0~255
D-MAX ERROR(3)
0~255
54. Gamma error (1) *4
GAMMA ERROR(1)
0~255
55. Gamma error (2) *5
GAMMA ERROR(2)
0~255
Nonadjustable
*1 = Drum monitor does not become 6 volts. *2 = Dmax signal does not become 1.5 volts. *3 = Dmax signal does not
change. *4 = Gamma signal does not become 9 volts. *5 = Gamma signals are higher than programmed values.
47 Mode Input/Output List for FS-103

Using mode 47, code 75, enter the appropriate multimode number and press the START PRINT button to select the desired function;
press STOP when completed.
Multi Mode
01
02
03
10
11
12
13
16
17
18
Item
M1
M7
M14
M2
M2
M2
M8
M3
M3
M12
Function/Description
Conveyance motor
Paper exit roller motor
Stacker entrance motor
Roller shift motor (1 rotation)
Roller shift motor (forward)
Roller shift motor (reverse)
Paper exit opening motor
Tray up/down motor (raise)
Tray up/down motor (lower)
Stapler rotation motor (angled)
Multi Mode
19
20
23
26
28
30
31
32
33
34
40
Item
M12
M5
M11
M10
M9
SD1/SD5
SD2
SD4
SD1
SD3
Stapler rotation motor (vertical)
Alignment plate motor
Stapler movement motor
Front stapler motor
Rear stapler motor
Gate/bypass solenoid
Printer paper exit solenoid
Paper exit opening solenoid
Gate solenoid
Grip solenoid
Reset/run mode
Using mode 47, code 76, enter the appropriate multimode number and press the START PRINT button.
Multi Mode
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
12
13
15
16
17
20
21
23
24
25
26
Revised 3/99
Item
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS11
PS12
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS20
PS21
PS22
MS1
Tray upper limit sensor
Tray lower limit sensor
Finisher entrance passage senor
Stacker conveyance passage sensor
Paper exit - 1 sensor
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
Alignment plate home position sensor
Paper exit belt home position sensor
Stapler movement home position sensor
Paper exit opening sensor
Rear stapler empty sensor
Rear stapler home position sensor
Front stapler empty sensor
Front stapler home position sensor
Roller shift home position sensor
Stacker empty sensor
Stapler rotation home position 1 sensor
Stapler rotation home position 2 sensor
Finisher door interlock
7-14
Intication When High

Upper limit detected
Lower limit detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Home position detected
Opening is closed
Staples remaining
Staples remaining
Paper detected
Door is open
DIAGNOSTICS
25 MODE
Copy Control/Service Control Mode Enable
The 25 mode is used exclusively for rewriting the contents of the

memory and therefore does not support normal copy operations.
Data entered into memory is used by the microprocessor to
This feature selects whether the copy control mode access is

enabled, the service control mode access is enabled, or both
modes are disabled.
establish certain parameters.
Setting Method
1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Turn the main switch back ON while pressing buttons 2 and
5. This will enable the 25 mode.
3. Select the address where the data is to be changed.
There are two ways to select the address:
a. Using the reduction/magnification buttons. The address
(P.**) will appear on the display.
b. Using the copy quantity buttons.
(1) Press the P button. The current address selected
will flash on the display.
(2) Enter the desired address by pressing the copy
quantity buttons. The selected address will flash on
the display.
(3) Press the P button. The display will change from a
flashing address number to one that is constantly lit.
4. The data currently stored in that address will appear in the
display (tens digit).
5. Enter the new data by pressing the copy quantity buttons.
The newly entered data will appear in the display (ones
digit).
6. Press the start print button. This will rewrite the data and
change the display to show the new data in the tens digit
position.
7. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 25 mode.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P25.
Enter the required data:

0: Protect
1: Copy control is enabled
2: Service control is enabled
This feature sets the protection for the service control operator
mode.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P52.

0: No function
8: Cancel protection.
This selects the function of the ECM mode.

Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P05.

0: ECM is not selected.
1: ECM is selected
(without stop)
3: ECM is selected
(with natural (soft) stop)
5: ECM is selected
(with forced (hard) stop)
Start print button
Data Control Function Select
ECM Setting
Step
1
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction button, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
7-15
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Pre-heat Mode Temperature Selection
Selection of Fusing Control During Auto

Shut Off
This feature selects the fusing temperature for the pre-heat

mode.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P12.

0: 160C
1: 170C
2: 180C
This feature enables/disables continued control of the fusing

unit during an auto shut off.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Step
1
Start print button
This feature selects the shut-off time for the pre-heat mode.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P19.

0~3: 1 hour
4~6: 2 hour
7~9: 3 hour
Select address P49.

0: No
1: Yes
Start print button
Setting of Auto Shut-off and Auto Preheat Timing
Pre-heat Mode Shut-off Time

Step
1
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Sets auto shut off and auto pre-heat timing.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P62.

Auto shut off
0: No
1: 2 minutes
2: 6 minutes
3: 10 minutes
Auto pre-heat
4: 2 minutes
5: 6 minutes
6: 10 minutes
Start print button
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Note: To enable this selection to function, address 49 in the 25

mode must be set to 1 (default is 0).
Revised 3/99
7-16
DIAGNOSTICS
Selecting Outside Erasing the Original
Selecting Preliminary Rotation of Polygon

Motor
APS sensors are used to determine image area with document

feeder open. Based on standard size paper
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P70.
A combination of 25/90 and 25/91 is used to set the low speed

idle of the polygon motor.
If set to 0 (default), 25/90 prevents the polygon motor from
stopping or rotating at low speed when at idle. (The motor will
continuously operate at a normal copying speed of 16,535 rpm.)
Noise during idle operation can be prevented by using 25/90 to
either decrease its idle speed or stop it (see table below).
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Step
1

0: Erase outside the original.
1: Entire image in the platen
mode.
2: Transfer paper prior any time
Start print button
* When data 1 is selected, whole image determined by

the selected paper paper size is copied only in case of
platen copy.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P92.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
Select address P90.
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
0: No preliminary rotat. 16535rpm buttons
(default)
1: Preliminary rotation at 14000 rpm
4: Stop
Start print button
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Polygon Motor Low Speed Rotation Timing

The 25/91 setting sets the time duration at which the polygon
motor will run at copying speed before reverting to the speed
selected in 25/90 (see table below).

0: Rectangular
1: Corresponding oblique original
Start print button
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P91.

0: 15 seconds (default)
1: 30 seconds
2: 60 seconds
3: 120 seconds
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Note: 1. Both factory defaults at 0 have the motor running

16,535 rpm at all times.
2. Reducing the idle speed to minimize noise level will
result in the delay of the copy cycle start due to the
additional time required to attain operating speed.
7-17
Revised 3/99
ATS Selection
Functions When Auto Button is Pressed or

Original is Placed in ADF
This feature is used to set trays for ATS.
This feature allows for selecting functions when the auto button
is pressed or when an original is place in the ADF.
Step
1
3
4
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P56.

0 to 3 (see *1)
Step
1
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Select address P08.

0: ATS is not selected.
1: ATS is selected for all trays.
2: ATS is not selected for the
upper tray.
4
*1: Automatic button function and ADF original setting indication.
Automatic button
ADF original setting
function
indication
ADF select
Full auto
0
ADF select
Manual select*
1
Full auto
Full auto
2
Manual select*
Manual select*
3
*Selectable by 25 mode, address P58.
This feature specifies whether or not the machine will count one
11x17 copy as two 8.5x11 copies.
Step
1
This feature enables setting parameters that will be automatically

selected when the auto button is pressed.
3
4
Select address P58.

0 to 7 (see *1)
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
ADF select
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
APS select
APS
APS
Manual
Manual
APS
APS
Manual
Manual
AES select
AES
AES
AES
AES
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
7-18
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P50.

0: One count
1: Two counts
*1: Settings that are available.

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start print button
11x17 Double Count Setting
Switching Auto/Manual Priority
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Note: ATS order is 2/3/4/1/2 unless data 2 is selected;

then, the order is 2/3/4/2.
Data
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
DIAGNOSTICS
Setting Paper Size for Trays 2, 3, and 4
FS-103 Original Count Over Control
Sets paper size for trays 2, 3, and 4.
Set the operation that is used when the original quantity

exceeds the specified limit.
Step
1
3
4
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select addresses:
P67: Tray 2
P68: Tray 3
P69: Tray 4
0 to 9 (see *1)
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Designate address P11.
Modify data.
0 - 9 (*1)
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
*1: Paper size selection list.

Data
0
1
2
3
4
*1
Paper size
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11R
8.5x11
8.5x5.5
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FS-103 Sub-tray Select (Printer)

Set if the sub-tray is used and paper exit direction.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P07.
Modify data.
0: Sub-tray is not used.
2: Sub-tray is used. (Reverese
paper exit)
3: Sub-tray is used. (Normal
paper exit)
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
7-19
Modification
Stops immediately (at max. 50 sheets)
Stops when current set of copy completes. (every 50 sheets)
FS-102/103 Overload Control Select
Message Language Selection
Set the operation for an overload when using the finisher.
This feature selects the language that will appear in the display.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P14.

0: American
1: British
2: French
3: Japanese
Step
1
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Select address P20.
Modifies data
FS-102
0: No control overload
5: Stops when paper quantity
exceeds specification or more
than 25 copies are stapled.
FS-103
0-9 (refer to *1)
Start print button
Start print button
Priority of the Paper Size

Set the priority of the paper size selected when auto-function
operates. (When APS released)
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P16.
Modify data
0: 11x17
4: 5.5x8.5
1: 8.5x14
5: SPECIAL
2: 8.5x11
3: 8.5x11R
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Performing lower limit detection by

PS3 (tray lower limit)
Detecting PS7 (staple paper exit upper
limit) abnormal ON by exiting paper
(more than 1 sec)
Detecting PS2 (tray upper limit)
abnormal ON by exiting paper.
Stop at predetermined number of
copies. (*2)
Select address P17
Modify data
0: 11x17
4: 5.5x8.5
1: 8.5x14
5: SPECIAL
2: 8.5x11
3: 8.5x11R
0~3
6~9
*2
Non-staple mode
Group mode
Offset mode
Set the most preferred paper size temporarily.

(Select by using P+cassette size button)
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
*1
Data
Jumping Selection of the Paper Size
Step
1
Operation
Start print button
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Paper size
B6R, A5R, 5.5x8.5R
B5R, B5, A4R, A4
8.5x11R, 8.5x11
B4R, F4R, A3R
8.5x14R, 11x17R
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Capacity (number of sheets)

500
2,000
1,500
Staple mode
Number of
sheets
2~9
1~20
21~30
31~40
41~50
Start print button
7-20
A3, 11x17 excluded

2 staple
1 staple
places
place
100 sets
100 sets
50 sets
50 sets
30 sets
30 sets
25 sets
25 sets
20 sets
20 sets
A3, 11x17
1 staple
2 staple
place
places
100 sets
50 sets
20 sets
15 sets
30 sets
30 sets
25 sets
25 sets
20 sets
20 sets
DIAGNOSTICS
Setting Intermittent Time for Running Test
Finisher Initial Mode Setting
This feature specifies the wait time for making intermittent

copies in the running test mode (36 mode).
This feature specifies the operating mode the finisher should

enter in its initial state.
Step
1
3
4
*
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Select address according to Magnification/
reduction butdesired waiting time.
ton, or the P and
P22: 3rd digit (102)
copy quantity
P23: 2nd digit (101)
buttons.
P24: 1st digit (100)
Copy quantity
Input the waiting time.
buttons
(1 to 255 seconds)
Start print button
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Step
1
The waiting time is from 1 to 255 seconds.

If more than 255 seconds is input, the machine will default
to 255 seconds.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P46.

0: Non-sorter priority
1: Sort is priority
2: Group priority
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
ADF Frame Erase Selection
Clearing Fusing Failures
This feature enables/disables frame erase for the ADF.
This feature resets fusing failures [F34], [F35], and [F36].
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P26.

0: No
5: Yes
Step
1
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P47.
Input 0.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start printbutton
Start print button
Auto Reset Setting

PM Cycle Setting
This feature selects the number of copies at which to display the
call for PM message.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select addresses:
P27: 5th digit (105)
P28: 4th digit (104)
P29: 3rd digit (103)
Input the PM cycle.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttonss,
main switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
This feature specifies whether or not an auto reset is to take

place.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P48.

0: No auto reset
1: Auto reset (1 minute)
2: Auto reset (2 minutes)
7-21
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Key Counter Operation Selection
Toner Level Detecting Selection
This feature selects how the copier will operate when the
hardware key counter (optional) is removed during a copy
cycle.
Sets display timing of toner replenishment.
Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P57.

0: Stops after completing the
current copy
5: Stop immediately.
Step
1
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Select address P60.

normal/high
0: 1ED/2ED*
1: 1ED/4ED
2: 2ED/4ED
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
4
Start print button
ADF Mode Lead Edge Erasure Setting

Sets the edge erasure amount for copies run through the ADF.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P61.

0: 2mm
1: 3mm
2: 4mm
3: 5mm

0: After copying 100 sheets.
1~3: After copying 1000 to 3000
sheets.
Step
1
*ED = error diffusion
Step
1
Start print button
Sets the master key code for entering into the ECM and data
control system operator modes.
Sets the combination of bit numbers when the image quality

button is OFF, or turned to High mode.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P71.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Master Key Code Setting
Switching the Contents of Normal/High
Step
1
4
Start print button
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
7-22
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
Select addresses P72 to P79.
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
Input the master key code into P72 buttons
(upper digits) to P79 (lower digits).
Start print button
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
DIAGNOSTICS
Original Image Shift Setting
Switching Longitudinal Line Paper/

Tranversal Line Paper
This feature enables/disables image shifting.

Step
1
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P31.

* See table below.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Set separation conditions depending upon the kind of small

size paper.
Step
Entry
Operation
1
Copy quantity
Enter the 25 mode.
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
2
Select address P88.
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
3
buttons
0: All transversal line.
1: Transversal line only 8.5x11,
5.5x8.5, and bypass.
*
Data
1-2 mode
2-1 mode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Original has a margin

Original has no margin

Shift on a
reverse side
Deleates a
right margin
on copying
paper
S h i f t s
copying
paper to the
left
Start print button
Both 1-1 and 2-2 modes treat all originals as no margin.

Margins on copying paper are set as follows based on the
above specifications.
Data
1-1 mode
1-2 mode
0 Shifts paper to the right. Shifts a backside to the left.
1
2
4
5
6
7
2-2 mode
2-1 mode
Shifts even pages to the right. Shifts a front side to the right.
Deletes a right margin on a backside.
Shifts a backside to the left.
Shifts paper to the right.
Shifts a front side to the right. Shifts even pages to the right.
Deletes a right margin on a
backside.
Shifts a front side to the right. Shifts paper to the right.
Deletes a right margin on a
backside.
Shifts even pages to the right. Shifts a front side to the right.
Shifts paper to the right.
Shifts a front side to the right. Shifts even pages to the right.
Shifts a front side to the right. Shifts paper to the right.
7-23
25 Mode Address Map

Address
Item
00
01
02
03
04
Setting range Initial value
Change details
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited

4 in 1 page placement
Selecting data control system
0~5
05
Selecting ECM
0~5
06
07

FS-103 subtray is selected. (printer)
0,2,3
08
Selecting auto tray switching (ATS)
0~2
09
10
FS-103 original quatity over is controlled
0-9
0: ATS not selected

1: ATS for all trays
2: ATS for all trays except universal tray 1
*See bottom of table.
11
12
13
Selecting temperature in pre-heat mode
0~2
0: 160C
14
Selecting message language
0~3
Priority of the paper size
0~9
Remarks
Set to 1 for 4 in 1 alignment (v24 EPROMs)

Impossible to set other than 0
0: Not selected
1: Selected (no stop in limiting)
3: Selected (stop in limiting)
5: Selected (forced stop in limiting)
0: Not use 2: Sub-tray (reverse) 3: Sub-tray (normal)
1: 170C
0: American
2: French
2: 180C
1: British
3: Japanese
15
16
0: 11x17
3: 8.5x11R
17
Jumping selection of the paper size (select by using P+cassette seize button)
1: 8.5x14
4: 5.5x8.5
2: 8.5x11
5: SPECIAL
0~9
18
19
Selecting the shut-off time in the preheat mode.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
0~9
FS-102/103 paper overload control

Selecting AMS
102
101
Waiting timer in the intermittent mode
100
0-9
0~1
0
0
0
0
1
Selecting a function to control data

(protection setting 1)
Selecting ADF frame erase
105
104
Setting PM cycle
103
0~2
0, 5
5
1
2
0
0~9
0~9
0 through 3: 1 hour
4 through 6: 2 hours
7 through 9: 3 hours
*D
0: Selected
1 second to 255 seconds
(After this period of time in

reduced heat mode, the
machine will shut off)
1: Not selected
(To enable job memory #9 as

boot, set address 22 to 1.
[version 24 EPROMs])
0: Protection
1: Canceling copy control protection
2: Canceling service control protection
0: No
5: Yes ( 5mm frame)
30
*1: Stops (at max. 45 sheets); 2: Stops (at max. 40 sheets); 3: Stops (at max. 35 sheets); 4: Stops (at max. 50 sheets); 5:
Stop after current copy (at max. of 50 sheets); 6: Stop after current copy (at max. 45 sheets); 7: stop fter current copy (at
max. 40 sheets); 8: Stop after current copy (at max. 35 sheets); 9: Stop after current copy (at max. 50 sheets).
Revised 3/98
7-24
DIAGNOSTICS
Address
Item
Setting range Initialvalue
Change details
Remarks
*C
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Setting original image shift
105
104
103
102
101
100
PM counter
0~7
0~9
1
1
9
9
9
9
46
105
104
103
Drum counter
102
101
100
Selecting input of an intersheet original
copy number
Switching finisher priority
47
Canceling fusing abnormality
0~9
48
Automatic resetting
0~2
49
50
51
52
0~2
0~1
0~8
0
0
0
0
53
54
55
Fusing control during auto shut-off

Selecting 11x17 count number
Data control function select
(protect setting 2)
1
0
3
56
Selecting auto button for items in No. 58
0~3
57
Selecting the key-count-immediately-interrupting mode
0,1,5,6
58
Switching auto/manual priority
0~7
59
60
61
Reading mode default

Selecting the contents of normal/high
Selecting the lead edge erasure amount
in the ADF mode
0-2
0~2
0~3
0
0
2
62
Auto shut-off and automatic pre-heating
0~6
0~1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0~2
0~9
0: Manual
1: Automatic counting
0: Non sort
2: Group
0: Cancellation
0: No
2: 2 minutes
1: Sort
0: No
0: 1 count
1: Yes
1: 2 counts
0: No function
8: Canceling protection
9: For global reset
1 ~ 9: Abnormal
1: 1 minute
Set to 0 for 600 dpi

A*
0: Copier and printer stop after last copy exits

1: Printer - Ignores key counter status
5: Copier and printer stop immediately
6: Printer - Ignores key counter status
Copier - stops immediately
B*
0: Normal 1: Fine 2: S-fine

0: 1ED/2ED
1: 1ED/4ED
2: 2ED/4ED
0: 2mm
1: 3mm
2: 4mm
3: 5mm
Shut off
0: No
1: 2 minutes
2: 6 minutes
3: 10 minutes
Pre-heating
0: No
4: 2 minutes
5: 6 minutes
6: 10 minutes
63~65
7-25
Revised 3/99
*A
*D
Automatic button function

Full auto
*Manual select
Full auto
*Manual select
ADF original setting indication

ADF select
ADF select
Full auto
*Manual select
*Selectable by 25 mode, P58.

*B
APS select
ADF select
APS
ADF
APS
Platen
*Manual
ADF
*Manual
Platen
APS
ADF
APS
Platen
*Manual
ADF
*Manual
Platen
*APS is selectable only for USA machine.
AES select
AES
AES
AES
AES
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
*C
Data
1-2 mode
2-1 mode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7


Shift on a
reverse side
Deleates a
right margin
on copying
paper
S h i f t s
copying
paper to the
left
Data
Operation
Performing lower limit detection by
PS3 (tray lower limit)
Detecting PS7 (staple paper exit upper
limit) abnormal ON by exiting paper
(more than 1 sec)
Detecting PS2 (tray upper limit)
abnormal ON by exiting paper.
Stop at predetermined number of
copies. (*2)
0~3
6~9
*1
Offset mode
Paper size
B6R, A5R, 5.5x8.5R
B5R, B5, A4R, A4
8.5x11R, 8.5x11
B4R, F4R, A3R
8.5x14R, 11x17R
Capacity (number of sheets)

500
2,000
1,500
Staple mode
Number of
sheets
2~9
1~20
21~30
31~40
41~50
A3, 11x17 excluded

2 staple
1 staple
places
place
100 sets
100 sets
50 sets
50 sets
30 sets
30 sets
25 sets
25 sets
20 sets
20 sets
A3, 11x17
1 staple
2 staple
place
places
100 sets
50 sets
20 sets
15 sets
30 sets
30 sets
25 sets
25 sets
20 sets
20 sets
*E
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Revised 3/98
Boot as
Copier/Printer
Copier
Printer
Copier
Printer
Copier
Printer
Copier
Printer
FS-103 - Unload
Paper Tray (P74)
Detection
Detection
No detection
No detection
Detection
Detection
No detection
No detection
600 dpi Fuser - Wait

or ready Immediately
Wait
Wait
Wait
Wait
Ready immediately
Ready immediately
Ready immediately
Ready immediately
DIAGNOSTICS
Address
Item
66
Preliminary for paper size setting
67
Setting paper size for tray 2
68
Setting paper size for tray 3 (1000 LCT)
69
Setting paper size for tray 4 (1500 LCT)
70
Selecting outside erase the original

(uses APS sensors)
Selecting sensing toner remaining
amount
107
Upper range
106
105
104
Master key code
103
102
101
100
Lower range
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
No toner counter (upper range)

No toner counter (lower range)
Setting range Initialvalue
Change details
Remarks
KBM:2
0~9
KBM:3
0: 11x17
3: 8.5x11
6: 9: 8.5x11
1: 8.5x14
4: 5.5x8.5
7: 8.5x14
2: 8.5x11R
5: 8.5x5.5
8: 8.5x11R
KBM:3
0~1
0~3
0~9
0: Outside erase the original 1:Entire image only in the

platen mode 2:Transfer paper prior any time
0: Display of toner replenishing after 100 copies
1 ~ 3: Display of toner replenishing after 1000 copies through 3000 copies
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
88
Switching longitudinlline/tranversal line
0,1
0: All is transversal
!: 8.5x11/8.5x8.5/transversal only for manual feeding
89
IP-201 connection
0 -7
90
Selecting polygon motor rotation during idle
0~4
91
Timing polygon motor low speed rotation
0~3
92
Selecting auto outside erase for original
0,1
0 = copier; 7 = printer; *E (see page 26)

0: No preliminary rotation 16535 rpm
4: Stop
0: 15 seconds
1: 30 seconds
2: 60 seconds
3: 120 seconds
0: Rectangular
1: Corresponding an oblique original
93
94
95
96
97
98
X
X
X
X
X
X
7-27
Revised 3/98
7-28
DIAGNOSTICS
36 MODE
Running Test Mode
This operating mode enables technicians to make adjustments

while operating various parts of the machine.
This mode will run the copier continuously to facilitate testing

procedures.
Setting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation
switch.
Input an address using the copy
quantity buttons.
Step
1
2
Remarks (status)
Selecting mode
36.
Setting the address number

Conduct initial
processing.
Press the P button. (*1)
Display data.
Input modified data using the copy Modify data.
quantity buttons. (*1)
Positive/negative is switched by
using the stop/clear button.
Inputting data.
Press the start print button. (*1)
Run a test copy.
Turn the main switch from OFF to Return to the
ON.
standard mode.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Input the running code (see *1)
Operation point
Page quantity
buttons.
Press the start print button. Start print button
(Initialization takes place)
After completing warming up, Start print button
press the start print button. (running
test mode starts.)
Stop the text by using the stop/ The stop/clear
clear button.
button.
*1 : Running code list

Code
00
01
02
03
04
10
11
12
13
14
*1 : Repeat procedures 4 through 7 if necessary.

Display and Input of Data
For 1 digit data, it flashes and displays as follows:

Positive data .......... x
Negative data ........ x
For 2 digit data, it flashes and displays as follows:

Positive data .......... xx
Negative data ........ and xx flashesalternately.
How to change data from a positive to a negative

value.
While inputting data, when pressing the stop/clear
button, the sign is switched from positive to negative
and from negative to positive.
Note: The setting method of the running test mode differs
from the above procedure; therefore, follow the running
test mode procedure when entering that mode.
7-29
Mode
x100
No paper
x100+no paper
Intermittent copy
Intermittent copy+no paper
x100
No paper
x100+no-paper
Intermittent copy
Intermittent copy+no paper
Total counting
Not counting
Counting
Adjusting Lead Edge Timing
Paper Feeding Loop Adjustment
The lead edge timing adjustment adjusts the distance from the
front edge of the copy to the starting point where the image
begins. This adjustment occurs in two ways:
Copy type adjustment

When one sheet is copied, and then multiple sheets
are copied, the lead edge timing of the first original is
memorized.
The data memorized indirectly correspondes to the
ON timing of the paper feed restart sensor (PS4) .
Electronic RDH (E-RDH) type adjustment

When multiple sheets are copied, the RDH memorizes
the read data of the first sheet. This data is then used
to process the remaining sheets being copied.
With this adjustment, the lead edge timing is memorized
using the electronic RDH.
The data memorized indirectly correspondes to the
ON timing of the paper feed temporary stop sensor
(PS14)
Adjusts the paper feed loop for each tray.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Note:
There is also a lead edge timing adjustment (printer
system) in Mode 35 - 80, P3. However, it is not used
because it is an outputting timing when this machine is
used as a printer.
Lead edge timing function in each tray and adjustment
function in modification are not equipped with.
10
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
Designate address 94.
buttons
Press the start print button to start Start print button
the initial processing.
Place an original on the platen
glass.
Select a paper feed tray.
Paper size button
Press the copy button.
Copy button
Visually confirm the outputted
copy.
Press the P button.
P button
The existing value flashes on the Copy quantity
copy quantity display.
buttons
Variable range of set value
- 20 to 00 to 50 (99)
Standard value (targeted)
00
Variable amount by one step
1ms
Press the P button.
P button
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
* The allowable range of paper feed loop is - 20 to 99 (99 is for

bypass only).
7-30
DIAGNOSTICS
Lead-to-Trail Magnification Adjustment
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment
Adjusts the lead-to-trail magnification.

Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Step
1
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
glass.
Start print button
Check for any deviation in size
between the original and the copy.
P button
Press the P button.
buttons
- 20 to 00 to 20
00
0.1 %
P button
Press the P button.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Standard value: Within 0.5% for the same magnification

Within 1 mm in 200 mm interval
200
7-31
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Place an 11x17 original on the
platen glass
Copy quantity
Select a copy quantity of one.
buttons
Start print button
Visually confirm the lead edge
timing of the copy.
P button
Press the P button.
buttons
- 99 to 00 to 99
00
0.1 mm
P button
Press the P button.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Original Lead Edge Erasure Adjustment
Electronic RDH Type Lead Edge Timing Adjustment

Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjusts the lead edge deletion area.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Place an 11x17 original on the
platen glass.
Copy quantity
Select a copy quantity of two.
buttons
Start print button
Visually confirm the lead edge
timing of the second copy.
P button
Press the P button.
buttons
- 99 to 00 to 99
00
0.1 mm
P button
Press a P button.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Standard value: -3 mm~+3 mm
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
glass.
Start print button
Visually confirm the amount of
deletion at the lead edge of the
copy.
P button
Press the P button.
buttons
00 to 99
1 pixel (63.5 m)
P button
Press a P button.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Standard value: Front edge erasing amount is

within 3 mm
Image
+3 mm
Paper
Erasing amount
3 mm
7-32
DIAGNOSTICS
Optical Brake Adjustment
Centering Adjustment
Adjusts the brake starting time of the exposure unit.
The centering adjustment adjusts the distance from the side of

the copy to the image area. When adjusting, follow the steps
below.
(1) Align each tray to the writing position on the drum using
the laser beam as a reference.
(Adjustment of one-side of writing unit.)
Due to this, complete adjustment for one-sided between the drum and the tray in copying the surface.
(2) Align the ADU using a surface copy original as a
reference. (Adjustment of ADU one-sided)
Due to this, complete adjustment for one-sided between a front surface and a rear surface.
(3) Adjust the writing timing to the drum using writing data
based on a reference established by the exposure unit.
(Adjustment of one-sided of original image.)
Due to this, alignment of the reading portion and the
writing portion is completed. In addition, a series of onesided adjustment is completed.
Step
1
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Press the start print button to start

glass.
copy.
Press the P button.
The existing value flashes on the
0 to 9
5
2 msec
Press the P button.
4
5
6
7
8
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Start print button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
Relationship Between the Copy Process and the OneSided Adjustment.
P button
Reading
(3)
Writing
(1)
Surface copy
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Rear surface copy

ADU
5.5x8.5R only
7-33
(2)
ADU Adjustment for Rear Side

Needed for duplexing 5.5x8.5R only.
Writing Unit Adjustment for One-sided

Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Select 11x17, from one side to Copy mode button
one side mode.
Select an adjustment tray.
Paper size button
While pressing the P button, select P button + the
code 1.
copy quantity
buttons
buttons
- 32 to 32
62.5mm
Press the P button.
P button
Press the start print button to out- Start print button
put the test pattern.
Fold the test pattern longitudinally
and confirm whether or not the left
line and the right line exactly match.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 35.
(*1)
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
11
If the lines do not match, perform

the one-sided adjustment for each
tray. (*2)
12
*1 : For details, see the mode 35 section.

*2 : For details on the mechanical adjustment for each tray,
see the other adjustment.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Press theimage quality button and SET/F1 button
select the HIGH mode.
Select 5.5"x8.5", from one-sided Copy mode button
to 2-sided mode.
Select tray #1.
Paper size button
code 2.
copy quantity
buttons
The existing value flashed on the Copy quantity
buttons
- 94 to 94
62.5mm
Press the P button.
P button
Press the start print button to
Start print button
output the test pattern.
Confirm that the central lines of the
front surface and the rear surface
of the test pattern exactly match.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 35.
(*1)
If the lines do not match, perform

the one-sided adjustment for each
tray. (*2)
*1 : For details, see the mode 35 section.

*2 : For details on the mechanical adjustment for the ADU,
see the other adjustment section.
7-34
DIAGNOSTICS
Adjustment on Original Image for One-sided
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
glass.
Start print button
copy.
P button
Press the P button
The existing value flashed on the Copy quantity
buttons
- 32 to 00 to 32
00
1 pixel (63.5 m)
P button
Press the P button.
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Alternate Method of Adjustment: 36 Mode,

Address 80
The adjustments in the table below can be performed by using
address 80 of the 36 mode without exiting the 36 mode to
access other adjustments.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
P-1
Magnification length
(lead to trail)
-20 to +20
One step = 0.1%
P-4
Optics brake timing
-00 to -09
One step = 2msec.
P-5
Registration 2
(memory)
-99 to +99
One step = 0.1mm
P-6
Registration timing 1
(first copy)
-99 to +99
One step = 0.1mm
P-7
Image missing
(lead edge deletion)
00 to +99
One step = 1 pixel
(63.5m)
P-8
Loop timing
(tray)
-20 to +50
One step = 0.1%
P-0
DF-306 registration
(select 1:1 & 2:1)
-99 to +99
One step = 0.47mm
7-35
Mode 36 List
For process
Classification
Code
x100 mode
No-paper mode
x100 +
no-paper mode
Intermittent copy
mode
Intermittent copy +
no-paper mode
x100 mode
No-paper mode
x100 +
no-paper mode
Intermittent copy
mode
Intermittent copy +
no-paper mode
Lead edge timing
adjustment mode
(copy type)
Copies the selected quantity x100.

Disables jam detection sensors, allowing the machine to operate without paper.
Disables jam detection sensors, allowing the machine to operate without paper for
100 cycles.
Copies selected quantity then stops according to a preset time, then continues to
repeat cycle.
Copies selected quantity then stops according to a preset time, then continues to
repeat cycle. Jam detection sensors are disabled to allow testing without paper.
92
Original lead edge

erasing adjustment
93
Vertical magnification
adjustment
94
Optical paper feed

loop adjustment
96
Optical brake
adjustment mode
97
One-sided adjustment mode
98
Lead edge timing

adjustment mode
(E-RDH type)
Mode wherein the amount of lead edge deletion is adjusted while copying
from the lead edge of the original, deletion for set pixel number.
00 99
Change the amount of data 1 = 1 pixel = 62.5 m
Mode wherein the vertical magnification is adjusted while copying.
- 20 00 20
(short) (standard) (long)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 %
Mode wherein amount of paper feed loop is adjusted while copying.
- 20 00 50
(small) (standard) (large)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 1 msec
Mode wherein the starting time for optical braking is adjusted while copying.
0
9
Changing the amount of data 1 = 2 msec
Mode wherein one-sided of the surface is adjusted while copying
- 32 00 32
Changing the amount of data 1 = 1 pixel = 62.5 m
Mode wherein the timing between the copy and the original image is adjusted while
outputting from the E-RDH.
- 99 00 99
(slow) (standard) (fast)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 mm
00
01
02
03
For development
04
10
11
12
13
14
91
Adjustments
Contents
Mode
Revised 3/98
Same operation as above, but the counter is enabled when selecting these codes.
Mode wherein the timing between the copy and the original image is adjusted while
copying.
- 99 00 99
(slow) (standard) (fast)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 mm
7-36
DIAGNOSTICS
35 MODE
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment
In this machine, mode 35 is used as a check via internally

generated test charts to verify copy quality concerning the
image processing and writing units. The resulting patterns on
these charts are used to diagnose for the type of adjustments
that must be perfomed.
Note: Do not attempt to use modes that are not described in
particular.
This procedure is for adjusting the lead edge timing when the
copier is selected as a PRINTER while in the super-fine mode.
Note: Do not use this adjustment when the copier is selected as
a COPIER refer to the lead edge timing adjustment performed
in the 36 mode in that situation.
Setting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
Remarks (status)
Select mode 35
2
3
Selecting an
address
Conduct initial
processing
copy quantity
a code number (*1)
buttons
Display data
Input the new data using the copy Modify data
quantity setting buttons. (*1)
Switch positive/negative using the
stop/clear button.
Operation
setting buttons 3 and 5, turn the
main switch ON.
Input an address location using
the copy quantity setting buttons.
Entry
Copy quantity button, main
switch
Copy quantity button
Press the start print button Start print button
to start the initial
processing.
Select 11x17 from 1 -sided Paper size and copy mode
buttons
to 1-sided mode.
Press the start print button Start print button
to output the test pattern.
Check the lead edge timing
of the test pattern.
Standard: 3.0mm
If the test pattern is not P and 3 buttons
within standards, press the
P and 3 buttons.
The existing value will Copy quantity button
flash on the display. Select
a new value (-99 00
99). Each step = 0.1mm.
P button
Press the P button.
Repeat steps 6 through 9
until the lead edge timing
is within the standards.
Step
Operation
1
Set to mode 35.
5
6
Data modification
is
completed
Conduct test
Press the start print button. (*1)
copy
Turn the main switch from OFF to Return to the
normal mode
ON.
9
10
*1 : Repeat procedures 4 through 8 if necessary.
7-37
Revised 3/99
Mode 35 List
7-38
DIAGNOSTICS
Test Pattern of Mode 35

Overall Halftone
35-01
[Check item]
* When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
If white stripes, black stripes, or uneven density can be seen, determine which of the two systems is
abnormal: the scanner system or the printer system.
* When the density is set to 0 (white)
If the test pattern is fogged, determine which of the two systems is abnormal: the scanner system or the
printer system.
* When the density is set to 255 (black)
If the density is light, determine which of the two systems is abnormal: the scanner system or the printer
system.
*
For details of setting the density, refer to [8] "Setting the Test Pattern Density" on page 7-5.
Test pattern
7-39
35-02
Gray Scale Pattern

[Check item]
If the test pattern has background or the density is light, determine which is abnormal, the processing system
or the gamma correction. If the copy image is abnormal despite this test pattern being normal, either the
image processing system or the scanner system is abnormal.
Note: each block is written by both lasers.
Test pattern
7-40
DIAGNOSTICS
35-03
Gray Scale Pattern

[Check item]
If the test pattern appears abnormal, check to see if the two lasers are functioning normally using 35-80 (P+6/
P+7).
Note: Each column is written by a separate laser.
Test pattern
7-41
35-05
Gray Scale Pattern

[Check item]
If the test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is output from the two lasers.
(Adjust in 35-80 mode, P+6/P+7)
Note: 1. Basically, composition needs to be even.
2. Each column is written by alternating lasers.
3. Blocks should be visible above upper line.
Note: This 35-05 and 35-80 have different chracteristics in low density areas.
Use 35-80 for adjustment.
Test pattern
7-42
DIAGNOSTICS
35-11
Beam Misalignment Check

[Check item]
If the test pattern appears abnormal, check to see if the positional correction of both lasers is normal.
(Same as 35-80 mode, P+5)
Note: Every line is written by a different laser.
Test pattern
7-43
Linearity Evaluation Pattern

[Check item]
Judge from this test pattern which of the systems is abnormal: the scanner system or the printer system.
Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, tilt, and leading edge
timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test
pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test pattern
31mm
Edge of paper
237mm
0m
190mm
20mm
Edge of paper
28
0m
28
190mm
35-16
7-44
DIAGNOSTICS
35-60
Process Overall Halftone

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge which of the systems is the cause of an abnormality such as white
stripes, black stripes, and shifting of density: the scanner system or the write system is
By using this test pattern, a copy process takes place with the lasers and the charging voltage OFF, and
halftones are output. If the test pattern appears abnormal, the processing system is abnormal.
Note: No charging and no laser beam are used in development.
Test pattern
7-45
35-30
Read Gate Array Built-in Pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the abnormal section is located before the image processing board. If the test pattern is an 8-bit output and is normal, the fault lies in the CCD board before the image
processing board.
Note: If there a problem with the copy and this output is good then the problem is in the CCD.
Test pattern
7-46
DIAGNOSTICS
35-32
Copy GA Built-in Pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the electronic RDH board is abnormal.
There are two test patterns which correspond to the 8-bit mode in which the electronic RDH is not used, and
the mode in which it is used, respectively. The test pattern checks the state of the electronic RDH board. If
an abnormality is found when an electronic RDH is used and several copies of the test pattern are output,
there is an abnormality in the electronic RDH. In this case, an abnormality in the test pattern excludes any
difference in error dispersion.
Test pattern
7-47
35-36
Write GA Built-in Pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the cause of an abnormality is located in or after the
image processing board. If the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in or after the image processing board (PWM function or after).
Test pattern
7-48
DIAGNOSTICS
35-37
Electronic RDH GA Built-in Pattern

[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to determine if the electronic RDH board or image processing board is abnormal
in the case where the copy image is abnormal despite the 35-36 mode pattern being normal.
If the 35-36 mode pattern is normal but the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in either the
electronic RDH or the image processing board.
Test pattern
7-49
35-80
(P+1)
Confirming on Writing Unit for Centering

[Check item]
Use this this test pattern to determine if the scanner system and the printer system (writing section, process
section) are abnormal. Items that can be checked include lead-to-trail magnification, front-to-back
magnification, tilt image, and lead edge timing of the printer system. This mode is used epsecially for the
centering error. If the copy image has centering error, the adjustment should be done by changing the
position of each tray.
Test pattern
7-50
DIAGNOSTICS
35-80
(P+2)
Confirmation on ADU for Centering

[Check item]
Use this this test pattern to determine if the scanner system and the printer system (writing section, process
section) are abnormal. Items that can be checked include lead-to-trail magnification, front-to-back
magnification, tilt image, and lead edge timing of the printer system. This mode is used epsecially for the
centering error. If the copy image has centering error, the adjustment should be done by changing the
position of the ADU.
Test pattern
7-51
35-80
(P+3)
Confirmation of Front Edge Timing (Printer)
Test pattern
7-52
DIAGNOSTICS
35-80
(P+4)
Confirmation of Printer Type Vertical Magnification

(Main Drive Speed Adjustment)
Test pattern
7-53
Revised 3/98
35-80
(P+5)
Confirming the Main Scanning/sub-scanning Alignment

[Check item]
If the test pattern appears to be abnormal, check to see if the positional correction of both lasers is normal.
(Same as 35-11 mode)
Test pattern
7-54
DIAGNOSTICS
35-80
(P+6)

[Check item]
If this test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is emitted from both lasers. Start position of the LD1
writing should be between the two lines.
(Adjust by changing data; adjustment range -64 to 64)
Test pattern
7-55
35-80
(P+7)

[Check item]
If this test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is emitted from both lasers. Start position of the LD2
writing should be between the two lines.
(Adjust by changing data; adjustment range -64 to 64)
Test pattern
7-56
DIAGNOSTICS
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
One-sided Adjustment
Lower Tray One-sided Adjustment
Tools used
Phillips screwdriver
Pyramid chart (11x17)
Securing screw
Upper Tray One-sided Adjustment
Securing
screw
Step
1
2
3
4
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation
Partially pull the top tray out.
Loosen the 2 screws shown.
Move the side plate and adjust for one-sided.
After adjustment, tighten the 2 screws and then
make copies to check the results.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 until the one-sided
adjustment is within standards.
7-57
Operation
Partially pull the lower tray out.
Loosen the 4 screws shown.
Move the cover forward or backward to adjust for
one-sided.
After adjustment, tighten the 4 screws and then
make copies to check the results.
Bypass Tray One-sided Adjustment
LCT Tray One-sided Adjustment

One-sided
adjustment plate
Adjustment screw
Front cover
Securing screw
Securing
screw
Bypass tray
Securing screw
Step
1
2
3
4
Operation
Loosen the adjustment screw and lower the bypass tray.
Move the guide forward or backward.
After adjustment, make copies to check the results.
Step
1
2
Operation
Pull the LCT tray out.
Loosen both screws of the front cover. Then
loosen the screw of each one-sided adjustment
plate (one plate on each side).
Move the one-sided adjustment plate forward or
backward until the one-sided adjustment is within
standards.
Standard value: Mis-centering ....... Within 3 mm

Standard value: Mis-centering ....... Within 3 mm
Within 3 mm
Center of image
Within 3 mm
Center of image
Center of paper
Center of paper
7-58
DIAGNOSTICS
Tray Tilt Adjustment
ADU One-sided Adjustment

Securing screw
Front cover
Set screw
Securing screw
One-sided
adjustment
plate
Step
1
2
Wire adjustment plate
If the tray is tilted, paper skew may occur. Adjust the tray so that
the tray and the paper feed roller shaft are parallel to each other.
Be sure to perform this adjustment after replacing wires A and
B.
Operation
Pull the ADU out.
Loosen both screws of the front cover. Then
loosen the 2 screws of each one-sided adjustment
plate (one plate on each side).
Move the one-sided adjustment plate forward or
backward until the one-sided adjustment is within
standards.
Note: Move left and right plate in the opposite
directions.
Tools required
Phillips head screwdriver
Adjustment method
(1) Loosen the set screw of the wire adjustment plate on the
front of the tray.
(2) Perform the adjustment by moving the wire adjustment
plate so that the top faces of both ends of the tray
coincide with the scribed scales, as shown in the figure.
(3) Upon completion of the adjustment, tighten the wire
adjustment plate securely with the set screw.
Standard value: Mis-centering ...... Within 3 mm

in 35-16 mode
(Image density : output with 255in
43-13
Within 3 mm
Center of image
Center of paper
Scribed scaled
Tray
7-59
7-60
MAINTENANCE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service Schedule
Classification
Number of copies (unit: 10,000 copies)
Service item (cycles)

12 24
36
48
60
72 84
96 108 120
Maintenance
(Every 120,000 copies)
Periodic check (I)
Periodic check (II)
Periodic check (III)
Main
body

Periodic check (IV)
Periodic check (V)
(Every 1,440,000 copies)
Periodic check (VI)
(Every 2,880,000 copies)
Maintance
RADF
(DF-306)

Periodic check (I)
Maintenance
Finisher
(FS-102)

Periodic check (I)
Maintenance
Finisher
Periodic check (I)
(FS-103)
(Every 1,080,000copies)
Periodic check (II)
(Every 2,520,000copies)
8-1
408 420 432 444 456 468 480 492
Maintenance Items
Main body (Every 120,000 copies)
No. Classification
1
Preparation
Fusing unit
Drum unit
Service item
Number
Implementation classification
of parts CleanReplaceLubriSupply
Check
replaced ing
ment
cation
(1) Image check

(2) Kit contents check
(3) 47 - 94 (Check adjustment 5155
(1) Fusing unit removal
(2) Jam clearance door removal
(3) Upper cover removal
(1) Drum unit removal
(2) Drum unit check
(3) Charge unit removal
(4) Charge control plate removal
and cleaning
(5) Charge wire replacement
25SA25090
(6) Charge corona unit
(back plate, PCL, etc. )
(7) Charge cleaning block (B)
(upper)
(8) Charge cleaning block (A)
(lower)
25SA-2530
(9) Developing unit removal
(10) Cleaning blade removal
(11) Drum removal
(12) Drum cartridge/PTL/developing
unit bottom plate/toner control
sensor/separating claw
(13) Recycle pipe check
(14) Toner collecting screw (A)
(15) Guide roller removal/drum set
Alcohol & cleaning pad
2
Cleaning pad
Blower brush
Blower brush
Blower brush & cleaning pad

* Clean toner control sensor with alcohol
Guide roller installation

(Guide roller 25SA-2080)
(16) Cleaning blade 25SA-2060
Material used
Tools used
1 each
1
(17) Cleaning blade and upper plate

installation
(18) Drum
8-2
MAINTENANCE
No. Classification
Developing bias intercept

Developer
Developing unit
Developing unit installation
Transfer/separation corona unit (front
5 Transfer/
and rear block/guide rail/separating
separation
bridge/enterplate/backplate)removal
corona unit
& installation
(See note 1)
(2) Discharge wire
25SA26120
(3) Wire cleaning part (1) and (2)
1 25SA-2630 2 25SA-2620
(4) Transfer/exposure lamp (PSL)
6 Machine in- (1) Upper part of conveyance unit
(2) Conveyance belt
side
(1) Paper dust removal brush
7 2nd paper
(removal)
feed unit
(2) 2nd paper feed roller
(3) Paper dust removing brush (installation)
(1) Drum unit installation
8 Drum unit
9 Drive unit & fil- (1) Back plate removal
(2) Developing suction filter check
ter
(3) Ozone filters H/S
H 25BA73090 S 25BA73060
(4) Timing belt check
(5) Drive gear oiling
(6) Back plate installation
(1) ADU intro. unit paper exit roller
10 ADU
(2) 4 position each of conveyance
and driven roller (ADU intro. unit)
(3) Timing belt (side external removal/ADU intro. unit removal/
belt check)
(4) Sensors (intro. unit: 2 points/
ADU horizontal unit: 3 points/
intro. unit & side external installation)
(5) Gears oiling
(intro. unit & drive unit)
Upper paper feed unit
11 Paper feed
(1) Upper right side plate and unit
unit (main
removal
body/LCT)
(2) Main bottom plate and area
around paper feed unit
(3) Double feed prevention rollers
(2 each tray)
25SA40960
4
Developing
unit
Service item
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Number
ReplaceLubriof parts CleanSupply
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
1
3
1 each
Blower brush
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & Cleaning pad
Cleaning pad & blower brush
1 each
Plas Guard No. 2
Blower brush
Plas Guard No. 2
(See Note 2).
Note 1: A maintenance procedure to enhance the performance of the transfer/separation corona is provided in the CORONA UNIT
SECTION of this service manual.
2: The actual replacement cycle for double feed prevention rollers is 80,000 copies. Check the total counter for each tray and
replace the double feed prevention rollers as needed.
8-3
Revised 3/99
No. Classification
11 Paper feed
unit (Main
body/LCT)
Service item
Number
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
Blower brush
Plas Guard No. 2
(3) Sensor (5 positions of upper tray)

(4) Gears (upper tray) oiling
(5) Conveyance/driven roller
(upper tray)
(6) Swing/feeding roller (3 positions
including bypass tray)
(7) Double feed prevention roller
(by-pass tray) removal, cleaning,
and Installation
(1st tray of main body)
(Cassette guide rail removal/
double feed prevention roller
cleaning)
(9) Cassette guide rail installation
(2nd tray of main body)
(Cassette guide rail removal/
double feed prevention roller
cleaning)
(11) Cassette guide rail installation
(12) Cleaning of LED board and centering error detection board
(13) Unit (cassette) and upper right
side plate installation
Lower paper feed unit
(14) Lower right plate and removal of
LCT unit
(15) Main bottom plate and area
around paper feed unit
(16) Sensor (4 positions of lower tray)
(17) Gears (upper)
(18) Conveyance and driven roller
(lower)
(19) Swing/feeding roller
(1 position)
(cleaning after opening open/
close cover)
(21) Unit (LCT) and lower right side
plate installation
LCT horizontal conveyance unit
(22) Horizontal conveyance rail removal
(23) Sensors

Blower brush

Blower brush
Plas Guard No. 2
Blower brush
8-4
MAINTENANCE
No. Classification
11 Paper feed
unit (main
body/LCT)
12 Reading
section
Service item
Number
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
Plas Guard No. 2
(24) Gears
(25) Conveyance roller (upper and
lower)
(26) Swing/feeding roller
(28) Horizontal conveyance roller
installation
(1) Platen glass (removal)
(2) Exposure lamp
(3) Reflection mirror
(4) Lens
(5) 1st, 2nd and 3rd mirror
(6) White reference board cover
glass
(7) APS sensor
(8) Photo interrupter
(9) Supply cord check
(10) Wire tension
(11) Optics guide rail oilling
(12) Dust proof filter 25SA62100


Blower brush
Cleaning pad
Blower brush
Blower brush
Multi oil & cleaning pad

1
13 Writing section (1) Dust proof glass (outside)

14 Fusing unit
(1) Oil pad removal
(2) Impregnated roller removal
(3) Fusing cleaning roller removal
(4) Fusing roller (upper)
(5) Fusing roller (lower) (paper exit
guide plate removal)
(6) Fusing claw (upper) and (lower)
(7) Paper exit roller
(8) Fusing entrance guide plate
(9) Fusing temperature sensor (2)
(10) Fusing gear oiling
(11) Fusing cleaning roller
(installation)
25SA53200
(12) Impregnated roller
(installation)
25SA53210
(13) Oil pad (installation)
25SA-5350
(14) Paper exit guide plate installation
(15) Fusing upper cover installation
(16) Jam clearance door installation
(17) Fusing unit installation
Roller cleaner & cleaning pad

Roller cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush & paper
Molytherm grease
1
1
1
8-5
No. Classification
Service item
15 Final check
(1) Toner cartridge supply

(2) L detection (with new developer)
47 - 95
(3) Warm up time measure and check
(4) Image check after changing
consumables
(5) Copy sample check
(6) PM counter reset
47 - 90
(7) Drum counter reset
47 - 91
(8) Leakage breaker reset
(9) Machine surroundings, externals
Number
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
Drum cleaner & Cleaning pad
RADF [DF-306] (Every 120,000 copies)

No. Classification
1
2
Service item
Number
of parts CleanReplaceLubriCheck
Supply
replaced ing
ment
cation
Material used
Tools used
Cleaning pad
Paper feed
(1) Double feed prevention sheet
unit
Conveyance (1) Conveyance belt
unit
(2) Each sensor
(3) Neutralizing brush
(4) Drive gear

Cleaning pad & blower brush
Plus guard No. 2
FNS [FS-102] (Every 120,000 copies)

No. Classification
1
Service item
Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller

unit
(2) Conveyance belt
(3) Conveyance stopper
(4) Conveyance guide
(5) Neutralizing brush
Stapler unit
(1) Sensors
(2) Stapling section
(3) Staple cartridge
PC/UA 947381
Number
ReplaceLubriof parts CleanCheck
Supply
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
Blower brush
8-6
MAINTENANCE
FNS (FS-103) (Every 120,000 copies)
No. Classification
1
2
3
4
5
6
Number
Cleanof parts
ing
replaced
Service item
Preparation (1) Paper passage check

Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller
roller unit
(2) Roller
12QR4525*
(3) Swing roller
12QR5065*
Paper exit unit (1) Paper exit roller/A 12QR4825*
Drive unit
(1) Main drive unit
*1
(2) Tray up unit
*1
(3) Shift drive unit
*1
(4) Paper exit unit
*1
(5) Staple unit
Stapler unit
(1) Staple
*2 12QRK001*
Final check (1) Paper passage check
(2) Exterior
Check
Lubrication
ReplaceSupply
ment
Material used
Tools used
Drum cleaner & clean pad

2
1
4
Plas guard No.2
Plas guard No.2
Plas guard No.2
Plas guard No.2
2
Drum cleaner & clean pad
*1: If noise occurs due to lack of oil, apply plas guard No.2.
*2: This work confirms if the staple is exchanged by CE.
Periodic Check (Main Body)

Periodic check (I) (Every 240,000 copies)
No. Classification
1
3
4
Number
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Service item
Charge
corona unit
(1) Charge cleaning block (B)

25SA-2540
(2) Charge control plate
25SA25080
Fusing unit
(1) Fusing roller (upper)
25SA53070
(2) Fusing claw (upper)
25SA53150
(3) Insulating sleeve
454053391
Drum unit
(1) Separating claw
25SA-2190
Drive section (1) Developing suction filter
(Filter parts)
540073070
Material used
Tools used
1
1
1
6
2
3
1
Periodic check (II) (Every 360,000 copies)

No. Classification
1
Paper feed
unit
Number
ReplaceCleanLubriof parts
Supply
Check
ment
ing
cation
replaced
Service item
25SA40960
540040562
Material used
Tools used
Actual replacement 80k
See bulletin #12
(2) Paper feed tire
8-7
Periodic check (III) (Every 480,000 copies)

No. Classification
Service item
Fusing unit
(1) Ball bearing
Optics unit
ADU
Paper feed
unit
454075040
(2) Fusing roller (lower)
25SA53720
(3) Fusing claw (lower)
25BA53330
(4) Fusing roller shaft holder
25BA76030
(1) Exposure lamp
25SA83010
(1) Paper exit conveyance pulley
25SA76550
(1) Resist roller (lower)
25SA41050
(2) Resist roller (upper)
25SA41060
Number
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
Periodic check (IV) (Every 840,000 copies)

No. Classification
1
Paper feed
unit
Service item
Number
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
(1) Feeding tire (A)

25AA40010
25BA40320
25SE83030
25SE83050
(2) Paper feed tire

2
Fusing unit
(1) Fusing lamp (L2)

(2) Fusing lamp (L3)
Periodic check (V) (Every 1,440,000 copies)
No. Classification
Service item
Drum unit
Transfer &
Separation
corona unit
Paper feed
unit
(1) Solenoid press-in assembly

25SA-2170
(1) Transfer and separation corona
unit assembly
25SA-2600
(1) Main body paper feed intermediate clutch parts
25SA82210
(1) Fusing entrance gear
25BA77261
Fusing unit
Revised 3/99
Number
Supply
ment
cation
replaced ing
1
1
1
8-8
Material used
Tools used
MAINTENANCE
Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,880,000 copies)

No. Classification
1
Writing unit
Drum unit
Paper feed
unit
Charging
corona unit
5
6
Developing
unit
Fixing unit
ADU
Service item
(1) Polygon mirror cleaning
Right side plate and writing unit
removing/Polygon mirror
surface cleaning/Right side
plate and writing unit installing
(1) Toner control board unit
25SA-910*
(1) Paper feed clutch
25SA8201*
(2) Paper feed drive shaft assembly
25BA-7653*
(3) Paper feed idler gear/A
25BA7704*
(4) Paper feed regulation gear/upper
25SA7726*
(5) Paper feed drive motor
25SA8003*
(1) Charging corona unit (PCL
included)
25SA-250*
(1) Developing unit
25SA-300*
(1) Temperature sensor 2
25SA8844*
(1) Conveyance pulley/C
25SA7659*
(2) Paper conveyance roller
25SA4310*
(3) ADU conveyance roller/D
25SA5016*
Number
Check
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
Cotton swabs and a 1:1
mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and acetone
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Periodic Check (I) (RADF [DF-306]) (Every 240,000 copies/200,000 copies)

No. Classification
1
Service item
Paper feed
(1) Paper feed belt
unit
1212ER4057*
(2) Paper supply rubber
12ER4034*
12ER4031*
Number
Supply
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
1
2
Periodic Check (I) (FNS [FS-102]) (Every 480,000 copies)

No. Classification
1
Stapler unit
Service item
Number
Supply
ment
cation
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
(1) Stapler unit

12FU22530
8-9
Revised 3/99
FNS (FS-103)
Regular service (I) (Every 1,080,000 copies)
No. Classification
1
Service item
Number
LubriReplaceof parts CleanCheck
Supply
cation
ment
replaced ing
Material used
Tools used
Process unit (1) Stapler unit (1)

12QR5210*
*1: Guarantee period of the stapler unit is 200K staples.

* Actual replacement interval of the unit: (5K staples/1 cartridge) x 40 cartridges.
Regular service (II) (Every 2,520,000 copies)
No. Classification
1
Drive unit
Service item
Number
LubriReplaceof parts CleanCheck
Supply
cation
ment
replaced ing
(1) Paper feed motor (tray up/

down unit motor) *1
12FU22530
Material used
Tools used
*1: When the motor is removed, remove it holding the up-down tray to the paper exit.
SERVICE MATERIALS
Service materials that are considered to be standard (for all models), such as plastic bags or other containers cleaning pads,
setting powder, lubricants, and cleaners, are not listed. Refer to Konica's Tool Bulletin series for a complete listing of standard
service items available from Konica's Parts Distribution Center. The Tool Bulletin series also provides information for obtaining
materials that are not supplied by Konica.
8-10
MAINTENANCE
SPECIAL TOOLS LIST

Tool No.
Description
Shape
7050K0010
Temperature sensor PS
adjusting jig
7050K0020
Optics position
adjusting jig
00M6-2-00
Door switch jig
00M8-1-00
Thermostat PS
adjusting jig
(upper roller)
00M8-2-00
Thermostat PS
adjusting jig
(lower roller)
00VD-2002
Potential adjusting chart
00VD-5000
New pyramid chart
8-11
Quantity
Remark
Tool No.
Description
Shape
00VC-2-00
Drum cover
Order from
R & K Supply Company *
Blower brush
DM15XL
Meter
* R & K Supply Company

650 W. Smith Road, #17
Medina, Ohio
44256
Phone: 1-800-362-6780
Fax:
1-800-840-TOOL
8-12
Quantity
Remark
INSTALLATION
9-1
9-2
INSTALLATION
9-3
9-4
INSTALLATION
9-5
9-6
INSTALLATION
9-7
9-8
INSTALLATION
9-9
9-10
INSTALLATION
9-11
9-12
INDEX
INDEX
Symbols
List of mode 36 ......................................................... 7-36

Optical brake amount adjustment ............................. 7-33
Original lead edge erasure adjustment .................... 7-32
Paper feeding loop adjustment ................................ 7-30
Running test mode ................................................... 7-29
Setting method .......................................................... 7-29
47 mode
Adjustment mode list (setting method) ........................ 7-5
Adjustment mode list (table) ..................................... 7-12
Charge corona current adjustment ............................. 7-3
Charge grid voltage adjustment ................................. 7-4
Developing bias adjustment ....................................... 7-4
Initial setting ................................................................ 7-5
Input check list ............................................................ 7-7
L detection adjustment ............................................... 7-6
Method of setting the 47 mode ................................... 7-1
Output check list .......................................................... 7-9
Separation (AC) current adjustment ........................... 7-3
Separation (DC) current adjustment ........................... 7-3
Setting the 47 mode and multimode ........................... 7-1
Telephone number setting ......................................... 7-6
Test pattern density adjustment .................................. 7-5
Transfer current adjustment ........................................ 7-3
1000 tray paper feed/conveyance unit (drive) .................. 2-24

1500 tray paper feed/conveyance unit (drive) .................. 2-25
25 mode
25 mode address map .............................................. 7-24
ADF mode lead edge erasure ................................... 7-22
ADF frame erasure .................................................... 7-21
ATS ........................................................................... 7-18
Auto button pressed or original placed on ADF ........ 7-18
Automatic reset ......................................................... 7-21
Automatic shut off and automatic pre-heating .......... 7-16
Cancellation of fusing abnormality ............................ 7-21
Copy control/service control mode enable ................ 7-15
Data control function ................................................. 7-15
Double count for 11x17 ............................................. 7-18
ECM .......................................................................... 7-15
Erasure outside of the original .................................. 7-17
Erasure of the outside of the original
automatically .......................................................... 7-17
Finisher initial mode ................................................. 7-21
FS-102/103 overload control select .......................... 7-20
FS-103 original count over control ............................ 7-19
FS-103 sub-tray select (printer) ................................ 7-19
Fusing control during automatic shut-off ................... 7-16
Intermittent time for running test ............................... 7-21
Jumping selection of the paper size .......................... 7-20
Key counter operation ............................................... 7-22
Master key code ........................................................ 7-22
Message language .................................................... 7-20
Original image shift ................................................... 7-23
Paper size for trays 2, 3 and 4 .................................. 7-19
PM cycle ................................................................... 7-21
Polygon motor low speed rotation timing .................. 7-17
Preliminary rotation of polygon mirror ....................... 7-17
Priority of the paper size ........................................... 7-20
Setting method .......................................................... 7-15
Shut-off time selection in the pre-heat mode ............ 7-16
Switching auto/manual priority .................................. 7-18
Switching the contents of normal/high ...................... 7-22
Switching longitudinal line paper/transverse line
paper ....................................................................... 7-23
Temperature selection in the pre-heat mode ............ 7-16
Toner level detection ................................................. 7-22
35 mode
List of mode 35 ......................................................... 7-38
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment ................................. 7-37
Setting method .......................................................... 7-37
Test patterns of 35 mode .......................................... 7-39
36 mode
Alternate method of adjustment: 36 mode, add. 80
7-35
Centering adjustment ............................................... 7-33
Lead edge timing adjustment ................................... 7-31
Lead-to-trail magnification adjustment ..................... 7-31
A-B
ADF frame erasing ........................................................... 7-21
ADF mode lead edge erasure setting .............................. 7-22
Adjustments
Adjustments when replacing parts .............................. 6-1
Centering adjustment ................................................ 7-33
Charge corona current ............................................... 7-3
Charge grid voltage .................................................... 7-4
Developing bias .......................................................... 7-4
Initial setting ................................................................ 7-5
L detection .................................................................. 7-6
Lead edge timing adjustment ................................... 7-31
When in printer mode (Mode 35 adjustment) .... 7-37
Lead-to-trail magnification ........................................ 7-31
One-sided ................................................................. 7-57
Optical brake ............................................................. 7-33
Original lead edge erasure adjustment .................... 7-32
Paper feed loop ........................................................ 7-30
Separation (AC) current .............................................. 7-3
Separation (DC) current ............................................. 7-3
Telephone number setting ......................................... 7-6
Test pattern density .................................................... 7-5
Transfer current .......................................................... 7-3
Tray tilt ...................................................................... 7-59
Adjustment mode list (setting method) .............................. 7-5
Adjustment mode list (table) ............................................ 7-12
Address map of the 25 mode ........................................... 7-24
ADU paper exit/conveyance drive unit ............................ 2-22
ADU paper exit/conveyance section ............................. 2-111
10-1
Revised 3/99
Composition ........................................................... 2-111

Disassembly and reassembly ................................ 2-112
M152 (ADU cooling fan) control ............................. 2-113
Mechanisms ........................................................... 2-111
Selector guide ........................................................ 2-112
ADU paper feed/conveyance drive unit ........................... 2-23
ADU paper feed/conveyance section ............................ 2-114
ADU mis-centering control ..................................... 2-119
Composition ........................................................... 2-114
Conveyance control ................................................ 2-118
Mechanisms ........................................................... 2-114
Paper feed/reversal control .................................... 2-116
ADU timing chart ................................................................ 4-2
AES control ...................................................................... 2-46
Alternate method of adjustment: 36 mode, add. 80 ......... 7-35
APS control ...................................................................... 2-44
ATS selection ................................................................... 7-18
Auto button pressed or original placed on ADF .............. 7-18
Automatic reset setting ..................................................... 7-21
Automatic shut off and automatic pre-heating setting ..... 7-16
Drive unit .................................................................. 2-29

Drum Unit ................................................................. 2-55
Externals .................................................................. 2-26
Fusing unit ............................................................. 2-123
LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section .................... 2-98
LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section .................. 2-102
LCT paper tray ....................................................... 2-106
Paper feed unit ........................................................ 2-84
Read section ............................................................ 2-33
Toner supply unit ..................................................... 2-78
Write unit .................................................................. 2-47
Connector disconnections list ......................................... 5-16
Others ...................................................................... 5-18
Paper jams (J codes) ............................................... 5-16
Warning (E, F, P codes) ........................................... 5-16
Control
ADU mis-centering .................................................. 2-119
AES ........................................................................... 2-46
APS ........................................................................... 2-44
Charge ..................................................................... 2-66
Conveyance .......................................................... 2-118
Cooling fan ............................................................ 2-135
Counter control ...................................................... 2-139
Developing bias ...................................................... 2-73
Dmax/drum jam control ........................................... 2-75
Exposure .................................................................. 2-43
FM14 (conveyance suction) .................................. 2-122
FM30 (developing suction) ...................................... 2-77
Fusing temperature ............................................... 2-133
Gray scale correction ............................................... 2-76
Image write .............................................................. 2-52
LCT 1000 tray PF/no paper detection control ........ 2-101
LCT 1500 tray PF/no paper detection control ........ 2-104
LCT tray up/down control ....................................... 2-110
M1 (main) ................................................................. 2-31
M3 (developing drive ) ............................................. 2-72
M4 (drum) ................................................................ 2-32
M5 (polygon) ............................................................ 2-51
M7 (charge wire cleaning) ....................................... 2-67
M8 (transfer/separation cleaning) ........................... 2-68
M12 (optics drive) .................................................... 2-39
M35 (agitator screw) ................................................ 2-73
M152 (ADU cooling fan) ........................................ 2-113
Operation panel control ......................................... 2-137
Option control ........................................................ 2-140
Original read ............................................................ 2-44
No paper detection .................................................. 2-97
Paper feed ............................................................... 2-93
Paper feed/reversal ............................................... 2-116
Paper guide plate .................................................... 2-60
Paper size detection ................................................ 2-96
Paper up/down control ............................................ 2-95
C
CCD unit ........................................................................... 2-34
Cancellation of fusing abnormality ................................... 7-21
Center cross section ........................................................ 2-18
Centering adjustment ....................................................... 7-33
Charge control ................................................................. 2-66
Charge corona current adjustment .................................... 7-3
Charge grid voltage adjustment ........................................ 7-4
Claws
Fusing (lower) ......................................................... 2-128
Fusing (upper) ......................................................... 2-129
Separation ................................................................. 2-57
Cleaning
Charge corona wires ................................................. 2-61
Polygon mirror ........................................................... 2-49
Transfer and separation ............................................ 2-62
Cleaning/toner recycling unit ............................................ 2-81
Composition .............................................................. 2-81
Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-81
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-81
Cleaning blade ................................................................. 2-81
Connector layout diagram .................................................. 3-4
Cooling fan control ......................................................... 2-135
Composition
ADU paper exit /conveyance section ...................... 2-111
ADU paper feed/conveyance section ...................... 2-114
Cleaning/toner recycling unit ..................................... 2-81
Conveyance section ................................................ 2-120
Corona unit ............................................................... 2-61
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-69
Revised 3/99
10-2
INDEX
PCL/PSL ................................................................... 2-59
Separation claw ........................................................ 2-59
Toner density ............................................................ 2-74
Toner level detection ................................................ 2-80
Transfer/separation .................................................. 2-66
Control board circuit diagram .......................................... 3-23
Conveyance control ....................................................... 2-118
Conveyance belt ............................................................ 2-121
Conveyance section ...................................................... 2-120
Composition ........................................................... 2-120
FM14 (conveyance suction) control ....................... 2-122
Mechanism ............................................................. 2-120
Conveyance suction motor (FM14) ............................... 2-122
Copy control/service control mode enable ...................... 7-15
Corona unit ...................................................................... 2-61
Charge control .......................................................... 2-66
Composition ............................................................. 2-61
Disassembly and reassembly .................................. 2-62
M7 (charge wire cleaning) control ............................ 2-67
M8 (transfer/separation cleaning) control ................. 2-68
Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-61
Transfer/separation control ....................................... 2-66
Corona wires
Charge ............................................................. 2-61, 2-64
Transfer and separation ................................... 2-62, 2-65
Counter control ............................................................... 2-139
Drum board circuit .................................................... 3-47

Electrical parts layout ................................................. 3-1
Operation board/1 circuit .......................................... 3-35
Overall wiring .............................................................. 3-7
Toner control sensor board circuit ............................ 3-45
Transfer paper detecting board circuit ...................... 3-46
Transfer paper LED board circuit ............................. 3-47
ADU paper exit/conveyance section ....................... 2-112
Corona units .............................................................. 2-62
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-70
Drive unit ................................................................... 2-29
Drum unit .................................................................. 2-56
Externals ................................................................... 2-26
LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section ..................... 2-99
LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section ................... 2-103
LCT paper tray ........................................................ 2-107
Paper feed unit .......................................................... 2-86
Read section ............................................................. 2-33
Toner supply unit ...................................................... 2-79
Write unit ................................................................... 2-48
Dmax control .................................................................... 2-75
Double count for 11x17 .................................................... 7-18
Drive system diagrams ..................................................... 2-19
1000 tray paper feed/conveyance unit ...................... 2-24
1500 tray paper feed/conveyance unit ...................... 2-25
ADU paper exit/conveyance drive unit ...................... 2-22
ADU paper feed/conveyance drive unit .................... 2-23
Drum/developing drive unit ....................................... 2-20
Main drive ................................................................. 2-19
Paper feed drive unit ................................................. 2-21
Drum ................................................................................ 2-57
Drum board circuit diagram .............................................. 3-47
Drum/developing drive unit .............................................. 2-20
Drum unit .......................................................................... 2-55
Composition .............................................................. 2-55
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-55
Paper guide plate control .......................................... 2-60
PCL/PSL control ....................................................... 2-59
Separation claw control ............................................. 2-59
Drive unit ......................................................................... 2-29
Composition .............................................................. 2-29
M1 (main) control ...................................................... 2-31
M4 (drum) control ..................................................... 2-32
Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-29
Dust prevention filter ........................................................ 2-27
D
Data control function selection ......................................... 7-15
DC driver board circuit diagram ....................................... 3-38
Developer ......................................................................... 2-70
Developing bias adjustment ............................................... 7-4
Developing bias control .................................................... 2-73
Developing drive unit ....................................................... 2-20
Developing suction filter ................................................... 2-27
Developing unit ................................................................ 2-69
Composition .............................................................. 2-69
Developing bias control ............................................. 2-73
Dmax control/drum jam control ................................. 2-75
FM 30 (developing suction) control ........................... 2-77
Gray scale correction control .................................... 2-76
M3 (developing drive) control .................................... 2-72
M35 (agitator screw) control ..................................... 2-73
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-69
Toner density control ................................................ 2-74
Diagrams, wiring ................................................................ 3-1
Connector layout ......................................................... 3-4
Control board circuit .................................................. 3-23
DC driver board circuit .............................................. 3-38
10-3
Revised 3/99
ECM setting ...................................................................... 7-15

Electrical parts layout ......................................................... 3-1
Electronic RDH ................................................................. 2-50
Erasure outside of the original selection .......................... 7-17
Erasure of the outside of the original automatically
selection ......................................................................... 7-17
Exit/conveyance drive unit, ADU paper ............................ 2-22
Exposure control .............................................................. 2-43
Exposure lamp ................................................................. 2-35
Exposure unit ................................................................... 2-36
Externals ......................................................................... 2-26
Composition .............................................................. 2-26
Image formation ............................................................... 2-10

Charging ................................................................... 2-10
Cleaning .................................................................... 2-11
Developing ................................................................ 2-10
PCL ........................................................................... 2-11
Separation ................................................................. 2-11
Transfer ..................................................................... 2-10
Exposure ................................................................... 2-10
Image processing ............................................................... 2-3
A/D conversion ............................................................ 2-3
AES processing .......................................................... 2-4
Analog processing ...................................................... 2-3
Brightness/density conversion .................................... 2-4
Copy correction ........................................................ 2-6
Error diffussion processing ......................................... 2-6
Image compression processing .................................. 2-6
Magnification processing ............................................ 2-5
Memory ....................................................................... 2-6
Outline ......................................................................... 2-3
Reversal processing .................................................. 2-6
SGU selector ............................................................... 2-6
Shading correction ...................................................... 2-3
Text/halftone identification .......................................... 2-4
Two-beam control ....................................................... 2-6
Write density control ................................................... 2-6
Image read mechanism ...................................................... 2-2
Outline ......................................................................... 2-2
Image write ......................................................................... 2-7
Beam combining prism ............................................... 2-8
Collimator lens ............................................................ 2-8
Compression prism ..................................................... 2-8
Cylindrical lenses ........................................................ 2-9
f lens ......................................................................... 2-8
Fine adjustment prism ................................................. 2-8
Index sensor ............................................................... 2-9
Outline ......................................................................... 2-7
Polygon mirror ............................................................. 2-8
Image write control ........................................................... 2-52
Initial setting ....................................................................... 7-5
Input check list ................................................................... 7-7
Installation .......................................................................... 9-1
Accessories ................................................................. 9-2
Confirmation of operation .......................................... 9-12
Installation procedure .................................................. 9-3
L detection adjustment ................................................ 9-8
Paper size setting ....................................................... 9-9
Site requirements ........................................................ 9-1
Unpacking .................................................................. 9-1
Intermittent time for running test ....................................... 7-21
F
Feed/conveyance drive unit, ADU paper ......................... 2-23
Finisher initial mode setting .............................................. 7-21
Filters
Developing suction .................................................... 2-27
Dust prevention ......................................................... 2-27
Ozone (H) ................................................................. 2-27
Ozone (S) .................................................................. 2-26
FM14 (conveyance suction) control ............................... 2-122
FM30 (developing suction) control ................................... 2-77
Front edge of the original adjustment (erasing) ............... 7-32
FS-102/103 overload control select ................................. 7-20
FS-103/103A paper jam code cross-reference table ........ 5-7
FS-103 original count over control .................................. 7-19
FS-103 sub-tray select (printer) ....................................... 7-19
Fusing application roller ............................................... 2-126
Fusing claws (lower) ...................................................... 2-128
Fusing claws (upper) ..................................................... 2-129
Fusing cleaning roller .................................................... 2-126
Fusing control during automatic shut-off selection .......... 7-16
Fusing heater lamp (lower) ............................................ 2-125
Fusing heater lamp (upper) ........................................... 2-124
Fusing input gear ............................................................. 2-30
Fusing roller (lower) ....................................................... 2-127
Fusing roller (upper) ...................................................... 2-127
Fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 ............................. 2-129
Fusing unit ..................................................................... 2-123
Composition ........................................................... 2-123
Fusing temperature control ..................................... 2-133
Mechanisms ........................................................... 2-123
G-H
Gray scale correction control ........................................... 2-76
Revised 3/99
10-4
INDEX
M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) control ................ 2-68

M12 (optics drive) control ................................................ 2-39
M35 (agitator screw) control ............................................ 2-73
M152 (ADU cooling fan) control .................................... 2-113
Main body timing chart ....................................................... 4-1
Main drive ........................................................................ 2-19
Main motor unit ................................................................ 2-29
Maintenance ...................................................................... 8-1
Maintenance items ..................................................... 8-2
Periodic checks .......................................................... 8-7
Service materials ...................................................... 8-10
Service schedule ........................................................ 8-1
Special tools list ........................................................ 8-11
Master key code setting ................................................... 7-22
Mechanisms
ADU paper exit/conveyance section ....................... 2-111
Corona unit ............................................................... 2-61
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-69
Drive unit ................................................................... 2-29
Drum unit .................................................................. 2-55
Fusing unit .............................................................. 2-123
LCT paper tray ........................................................ 2-106
Paper feed unit .......................................................... 2-84
Read section ............................................................. 2-33
Write unit ................................................................... 2-47
Message language selection ........................................... 7-20
Motors
Conveyance suction (FM14) ................................... 2-122
Main unit (M1) ........................................................... 2-29
Jam list ............................................................................... 5-1

Paper jam (J codes) .................................................... 5-1
Trouble (E, F codes) ................................................. 5-10
Warning (P codes) ...................................................... 5-8
Jumping selection of the paper size ................................. 7-20
K
Key counter operation selection ...................................... 7-22
L
L detection adjustment ....................................................... 7-6
Lamps
Exposure ................................................................... 2-35
Fusing lamp (lower) ................................................ 2-125
Fusing lamp (upper) ................................................ 2-124
PCL ........................................................................... 2-58
LCT 1000 tray paper feed/conveyance section ................ 2-98
Composition .............................................................. 2-98
LCT 1000 tray PF/no paper detection control ......... 2-101
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-98
LCT 1500 tray paper feed/conveyance section .............. 2-102
Composition ............................................................ 2-102
Disassembly and reassembly ................................. 2-103
LCT 1500 tray PF/no paper detection control ......... 2-104
Mechanisms ............................................................ 2-102
LCT paper tray ............................................................... 2-106
Composition ............................................................ 2-106
Mechanisms ............................................................ 2-106
Tray up/down control .............................................. 2-110
Lead edge timing adjustment .......................................... 7-31
When in printer mode (35 mode adjustment) ........... 7-37
Lead-to-trail magnification adjustment ............................ 7-31
List of 35 mode ................................................................ 7-38
List of 36 mode ................................................................ 7-36
List of connector disconnections ..................................... 5-16
Others ....................................................................... 5-18
Paper jams (j codes) ................................................. 5-16
Warning (E, F, P codes) ............................................ 5-16
N
No paper detection control .............................................. 2-97
NVRAM, Initializing the ...................................................... 7-2
O
Oil pad ......................................................................... 2-126
One-sided adjustment ..................................................... 7-57
Operation board/1 circuit diagram ................................... 3-35
Operation panel control ................................................. 2-137
Operation section ............................................. See chapter 1
Optical brake adjustment ................................................. 7-33
Optics wire ....................................................................... 2-37
M
M1
M3
M4
M5
M7
(main) control ............................................................. 2-31

(developing drive) control .......................................... 2-72
(drum) control ............................................................. 2-32
(polygon) control ........................................................ 2-51
(charge wire cleaning) control ................................... 2-67
10-5
Revised 3/99
Option control ................................................................. 2-140

Original image shift setting ............................................. 7-23
Original lead edge erasure adjustment .......................... 7-32
Original read control ........................................................ 2-44
Outline and composition ................................................... 2-1
Output checklist ................................................................. 7-9
Overall wiring diagram ....................................................... 3-7
Ozone filter (H) ................................................................. 2-27
Ozone filter (S) ................................................................. 2-26
Read section ................................................................... 2-33

AES control ............................................................... 2-46
APS control ............................................................... 2-44
Composition ............................................................. 2-33
Exposure control ....................................................... 2-43
M12 (optics drive) control .......................................... 2-39
Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-33
Original read control ................................................. 2-44
Removal/replacement
1000 tray (LCT) ....................................................... 2-107
1500 tray (LCT) ....................................................... 2-107
ADU paper exit conveyance section ....................... 2-112
CCD unit ................................................................... 2-34
Charge corona unit ................................................... 2-62
Charge corona wire ................................................... 2-64
Cleaning blade .......................................................... 2-81
Conveyance belt ..................................................... 2-121
Conveyance suction motor (FM14) ......................... 2-122
Conveyance unit ..................................................... 2-121
Developer .................................................................. 2-70
Developing suction filter ............................................ 2-27
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-70
Drum ......................................................................... 2-57
Drum unit .................................................................. 2-56
Dust prevention ......................................................... 2-27
Electronic RDH ......................................................... 2-50
Exposure lamp .......................................................... 2-35
Exposure unit ............................................................ 2-36
Fusing application roller .......................................... 2-126
Fusing cleaning roller .............................................. 2-126
Fusing claws (lower) ............................................... 2-128
Fusing claws (upper) ............................................... 2-129
Fusing lamp (lower) ................................................ 2-125
Fusing lamp (upper) ................................................ 2-124
Fusing rollers (upper and lower) ............................. 2-127
Fusing unit .............................................................. 2-124
Fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 ...................... 2-129
Fusing input gear ...................................................... 2-30
Main motor unit ......................................................... 2-29
Oil pad ..................................................................... 2-126
Optics wire ................................................................ 2-37
Ozone filter (H) .......................................................... 2-27
Ozone filter (S) .......................................................... 2-26
Paper feed drive shaft ............................................... 2-30
Paper feed unit ......................................................... 2-86
Paper feed unit (second) .......................................... 2-91
PCL ........................................................................... 2-58
P-Q
P function, setting and checking with ................................. 6-3
Confirmation items by means of the P function ........... 6-3
Density shift ................................................................ 6-4
Drum count and resetting ............................................ 6-4
Functions to control data ............................................ 6-5
PM count and resetting ............................................... 6-3
Service Data Control Operation Mode Access ........... 6-4
Paper exit/conveyance drive unit, ADU ............................ 2-22
Paper feed control ........................................................... 2-93
Paper feed/conveyance drive unit, ADU ........................... 2-23
Paper feed/conveyance unit, 1000 tray ............................ 2-24
Paper feed/conveyance unit, 1500 tray ............................ 2-25
Paper feed drive shaft ...................................................... 2-30
Paper feed drive unit ........................................................ 2-21
Paper feed loop adjustment ............................................ 7-30
Paper feed/reversal control ........................................... 2-116
Paper feed unit ................................................................ 2-84
Composition ............................................................. 2-84
Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-84
No paper detection control ....................................... 2-97
Paper feed control .................................................... 2-93
Paper size detection control ..................................... 2-96
Paper up/down control ............................................. 2-95
Paper guide plate control ................................................ 2-60
Paper size detection control ............................................ 2-96
Paper size setting for trays 2, 3 and 4 ............................. 7-19
Paper up/down control ..................................................... 2-95
Parts that operate when the main switch is OFF .......... 2-134
Parts that operate when the main switch is ON ............ 2-134
PCL
........................................................................... 2-58
PCL/PSL control .............................................................. 2-59
Periodic checks ................................................................. 8-7
PM cycle setting ............................................................... 7-21
Polygon mirror ................................................................. 2-49
Polygon motor low speed rotation timing ........................ 7-17
Preliminary rotation of polygon motor selection .............. 7-17
Priority of the paper size .................................................. 7-20
Product specifications ..................................................... 2-16
Revised 3/99
10-6
INDEX
adjustment ) (35-80, P+4) ....................................... 7-53
Linearity evaluation pattern (35-16) ......................... 7-44
Overall halftone (35-01) ............................................ 7-39
Process overall halftone (35-60) .............................. 7-45
Read gate array built-in pattern (35-30) ................... 7-46
Write gate array built-in pattern (35-36) ................... 7-48
Writing unit for centering (35-80, P+1) ...................... 7-50
Main scanning sub-scanning alignment
(35-80, P+5) ............................................................ 7-54
Thermostat (lower) ......................................................... 2-131
Thermostat (upper) ........................................................ 2-130
Timing charts
ADU ............................................................................ 4-2
Main body ................................................................... 4-1
Toner control board unit ................................................... 2-71
Toner control sensor board circuit .................................... 3-45
Toner density control ........................................................ 2-74
Toner level detection control ............................................ 2-80
Toner level detection selection ........................................ 7-22
Toner supply unit .............................................................. 2-78
Composition .............................................................. 2-78
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-78
Toner level detection control ..................................... 2-80
Transfer current adjustment ............................................... 7-3
Transfer paper LED board circuit diagram ...................... 3-47
Transfer paper detecting board circuit diagram .............. 3-46
Transfer/separation control .............................................. 2-66
Transfer/separation corona maintenance ....................... 2-65
Tray paper feed conveyance unit, 1000 .......................... 2-24
Tray paper feed conveyance unit, 1500 .......................... 2-25
Tray tilt adjustment ........................................................... 7-59
Tray up/down control ..................................................... 2-110
Separation claws ...................................................... 2-57

Separation claw solenoid press-fit assembly ......... 2-58
Thermostat (lower) ................................................. 2-131
Thermostat (upper) ................................................ 2-130
Toner control board unit ........................................... 2-71
Transfer and separation corona unit ........................ 2-62
Transfer and separation wires ................................. 2-65
Write unit ................................................................... 2-48
Rollers, fusing (upper and lower) ................................. 2-127
Running test mode .......................................................... 7-29
S
Selector guide (ADU paper exit conveyance section) ... 2-112
Separation claw control .................................................... 2-59
Separation claws .............................................................. 2-57
Separation claw solenoid press-fit asssembly ................. 2-58
Separation (AC) current adjustment ................................... 7-3
Separation (DC) current adjustment .................................. 7-3
Service materials .............................................................. 8-10
Service schedule ................................................................ 8-1
Setting the 25 mode ......................................................... 7-15
Setting the 35 mode ......................................................... 7-37
Setting the 36 mode ......................................................... 7-29
Setting the 47 mode and multimode .................................. 7-1
Shut-off time selection in the pre-heat mode ................... 7-16
Space requirements ......................................................... 2-15
Special tools list ............................................................... 8-11
Specifications ................................................................... 2-16
Switching auto/manual priority ......................................... 7-18
Switching the contents of normal/high ............................. 7-22
Switching longitudinal line paper/transverse line
paper .............................................................................. 7-23
System configuration ........................................................ 2-13
W-X-Y-Z
T-U-V
Wiring diagrams ................................................................. 3-1

Connector layout ......................................................... 3-4
Control board circuit .................................................. 3-23
DC driver board circuit .............................................. 3-38
Drum board circuit ..................................................... 3-47
Electrical parts layout .................................................. 3-1
Operation board/1 circuit ........................................... 3-35
Overall wiring .............................................................. 3-7
Toner control sensor board circuit ............................ 3-45
Transfer paper detecting board circuit ...................... 3-46
Transfer paper LED board circuit ............................. 3-47
Wiring diagram, overall ...................................................... 3-7
Write unit .......................................................................... 2-47
Composition ............................................................. 2-47
Telephone number setting ................................................. 7-6

Temperature selection in the pre-heat mode ................... 7-16
Temperature sensors 1 and 2, fusing ............................ 2-129
Test pattern density adjustment ......................................... 7-5
Test patterns of 35 mode ................................................. 7-39
Adjustment of gradation (LD1) (35-80, P+6) ............. 7-55
Adjustment of gradation (LD2) (35-80, P+7) ............. 7-56
ADU for centering (35-80, P+2) ................................ 7-51
Beam misalignment check (35-11) ........................... 7-43
Copy gate array built-in pattern (35-32) ................. 7-47
Electronic RDH GA built-in pattern (35-37) .............. 7-49
Front edge timing (printer) (35-80, P+3) ................... 7-52
Gray scale pattern (35-02) ........................................ 7-40
Horizontal magnification (main drive speed
10-7
Revised 3/99
Disassembly and reassembly .................................. 2-48

Image write control ................................................... 2-52
M5 (polygon) control ................................................. 2-51
Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-47
Revised 3/99
10-8

Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SERVICE MANUAL

Corporate Publications Department

1999, KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................

M152 (ADU Cooling Fan) Control ..................... 2-113

DEVELOPING UNIT ................................................ 2-69

Polygon Motor Low Speed Rotation Timing ...... 7-17

Linearity Evaluation Pattern (35-16) ........... 7-44

SERVICE SCHEDULE ............................................... 8-1

The electrical circuit of this machine contains the following

Overall Safety Circuit Protector

Protection function provided by software

Protection function provided by the circuit breaker

Protection function using hardware timer circuit

This function breaks the AC line instantaneously in the

If L1 remains lit for more than prescribed time because of

Protection function using optics temperature fuse

Protection function provided by the upper thermostat

Fusing Heater Lamp (L2, L4) Overheating

Protection function provided by software

Protection function provided by hardware circuit

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

can cause burns.

Knnen verbrennungen verursachen.

Bitte vorsicht bei antfernen

This portion is internally very hot.

HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION.

This portion has a high

This page left blank intentionally.

OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION

Image write unit

Image processing unit

Separation <- Transfer corona

IMAGE READ MECHANISM

Image processing board

The voltage output from each pixel of the CCD sensor

The analog signal produced by the CCD sensor on the A/D

Based on the difference between the white and black

ADF mode (1-1): 176 mm x 28 mm

The signal resulting from shading correction corresponds to

ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2): 176 mm x 210 mm

AES Sampling Range

Text/Dot Pattern Identification

Text filter: highlights the light and dark parts of the

Dot pattern filter: reduces moire.

Photograph filter: improves the gray scale reproduction.

Front-to-Rear Magnification Change Processing

In an analog machine, the lead-to-trail magnification is changed

As shown in the example of Figure 11, if the pixel data obtained

Original read position

Front-to-Rear Magnification Change Processing

Data position when the

As shown in the example of Figure 10, if the pixel data

There will be a gap between one data and the next,

The data position and write position will not coincide

Data position when

Image Compression Processing

This function reverses the input brightness data in order to

This processing function stores compressed image data in

The copy correction function selects the density curve

The memory can hold about seventy 8.5x11 size originals

Write Density Control

The write density control function converts image data to the

Laser exposure level